JP6542453B1 - Game console - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game console characterized by a notification method. A first game in which a bet number of game media is a first number and a second game in which a bet number of game media is a second number are configured to be executable, and a plurality of types of One display of the display is a first display including an image showing a certain value, and one display of the plurality of kinds of displays shows an image showing the updated value of the certain value. It is a second display that includes. In addition, when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated and the second display is displayed in the first game. In the second game, the count value is updated and the second game is updated when execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state. The second display is configured not to be displayed. [Selected figure] Figure 79

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, as one of gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine which is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player until a certain number of times of playing is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a game console where the player can arbitrarily select the number of bets for one game.

JP 2005-296354 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the notification method when a game with a non-recommended bet number (for example, one) is played in the advantageous gaming state.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by a notification method.

A game console according to the present invention is a game console provided with operation means, control means for shifting to any one of the normal state and the advantageous state, and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. Te, the operation information of the operating means being capable of informing configured, the advantageous condition, annunciation of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as "operation Navi".) in the case of favorable conditions than the normal state with respect to the The operation navigation is a navigation about a pressing order, and includes a first counter related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, a count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as “first The above-mentioned "end value" is configured to be able to be updated, and to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied. the first of the month A condition satisfied if the cement value becomes a specific value, in the preferred state, which is transferable configured in any of a plurality of beneficial gaming state, among the plurality of advantageous gaming state One advantageous gaming state is a first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state capable of executing the operation navigation, and a second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state Each time a game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "the second count value") can be updated, and the second The second count value is configured to be able to be updated even if a game is not won in the one of the advantageous game states, and the first bet number of game media is bet. The first game that is The second game, in which the bet number is a second number, is configured to be executable, and the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the second number is the second number. The first game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the game, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as “first display And one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). the certain value is a value relating to the second count value, after the first display in the first preferred gaming state is displayed, when the execution of the first game is started The count value of both the first count value and the second count value is updated to Wherein the gaming second display is configured to be displayed, after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when the execution of the second game is started, Configured that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game It is a game stand that features it.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by a notification method.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention in a state in which the front door is open. FIG. 10 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine related to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (A) It is a figure which expand | deploys and shows planarly the arrangement | sequence of the design given to each reel of the slot machine concerning Embodiment 1 of this invention. (B) shows a pay line of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (A) It is a figure showing the kind of winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-piece betting game. (B) It is a figure showing the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the operation or the payout of each winning combination in the two-piece betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is the figure which matched the lighting mode of display data and the number display part 127 of payout. (A) An image of the effect table provided in the first sub control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the judgment state presentation table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state presentation table. (D) is a figure showing a modification of a LMT state production table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub control unit 500. (A) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation reception process of step S102 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of Fig.14 (a). (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of production state control processing A of Step S106 of Drawing 10 in detail. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of each game common processing of step S401 of Fig.15 (a). (A) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of low navigation state processing A of Step S404 of Drawing 17 (a). It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state process A of FIG.15 (a) step S405. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of high navigation state common processing A of Step S801 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state process A of FIG.17 S803. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of decision notification state processing A of Step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT1 state process A of FIG.17 S807. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the judgment state process A of FIG.17 S809. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT2 state process A of FIG.17 S811. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the withdrawal state process A of FIG.17 S813. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process of FIG.17 S814. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production | presentation state control processing B of FIG.10 S113. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state process B of FIG.26 S1704. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state process B of FIG.27 S1802. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the firm notification state process B of FIG.27 S1804. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state process B of step S1806 in FIG. 27. FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of judge state processing B in step S1808 of FIG. 27. FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state process B in step S1810 of FIG. 27. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the withdrawal state process B of FIG.27 S1812. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of LMT state process B in step S 1813 of FIG. 27. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navi state end process of step S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state process A which concerns on the modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state process A which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of decision notification state processing A concerning modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of decision notification state processing A concerning modification 2. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of a confirmation notification state process A according to Modification 3; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of a confirmation notification state process B according to Modification 3; FIG. It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including a working combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. (A) It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. (B), (c) It is a transition diagram of the AT type | game state of the main control part 300 of the slot machine which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order of this embodiment. It is the figure which matched the lighting mode of display data and the number display part 127 of payout. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing according to a modification of the first embodiment, which corresponds to the main control unit main processing according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 10. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of production state control processing A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to presentation state control processing A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown to Fig.15 (a). (B) A flowchart showing a flow of each game common processing according to a modification of the first embodiment, which corresponds to each game common processing according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a flow of high navigation state processing A according to a modification of the first embodiment, which corresponds to high navigation state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 17. 7 is a flowchart showing a flow of effect processing according to a modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow of effect state control processing B according to a modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to effect state control processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 26. FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a flow of high navigation state processing B according to a modification of the first embodiment, which corresponds to high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27. In the high navigation state, after the effect state is shifted in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → LMT state (limit state), the counter of the case where only 3 bet games are played in the case of transition to the low navigation state normal state. It is a figure showing an example of an update display. After transitioning in the order of AT2 state → Judge state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, the production state transitions to the normal state in the low navigation state after the transition to the low navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter at the time of performing. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when judgment is not performed by a 2 piece bet game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when judgment and ED production are not performed by a 2 piece betting game. In the high navigation state, after the production state is shifted in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state), the transition to the low navigation state normal state is made, ED effect and freeze effect when only three bet game is performed It is the figure which showed an example. (A) In the case of transition to the normal state of the low navigation state after the effect state is shifted in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, the three bet game and the two bet game are performed It is the figure which showed an example of ED production and freeze production of the time. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting suggestion effect described using FIG. 56 (a). It is a figure showing an example of a setting suggestion effect when a 2 bet game is continued in a judge state in a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure showing an example of the 2nd freeze effect at the time of performing a 3-piece bet game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of 2nd freeze production at the time of performing a 2 piece bet game in the middle of AT2 state. It is a figure showing an example of ED production in, when 3 pieces bet game is performed. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of ED production in, when it transfers to a LMT state, after performing a 2 bet game in a normal state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of ED production in, when 2 bet game is continued in a normal state. (A) It is a figure showing an example of ED production performed after BB game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of ED production performed during internal winning of BB. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation in case the interlocking production advances normally. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation in case the interlocking production does not advance normally. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation in case ED production is started, without an interlocking production advancing normally. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the interlocking production in, when 2 bet game is continued in a judgment state. It is a figure showing interlocking production and its modification. (A) is a figure showing an example of the flow of an effect at the time of performing a 3 bet game when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of an effect at the time of performing a 2 bet game, when a production | presentation state transfers to a judge state from a AT2 state in a high navi state. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification of the flow of the effect at the time of performing a 3-piece bet game, when a production | presentation state transfers from an AT2 state to a judge state in a high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification of the flow of the production at the time of performing a 2 bet game, when a production state transfers to a judge state from a AT2 state in a high navigation state. It is a figure showing a concrete example of a flow of an effect including specific indication. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect at the time of 3 pieces of games being performed in the high navigation state, reaching the ceiling, and the effect state transitioning in the order of normal state-> definite notification state-> AT1 state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case a production | presentation state is maintained in a normal state, without performing a 2-piece bet game in a high navigation state and reaching a ceiling. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect at the time of 3 stage game and 2 bet game being performed in the high navigation state, reaching the ceiling, and the effect state transitioning in the order of normal state-> definite notice state-> AT1 state. . It is a figure showing an example of the flow of an effect in the case of shifting to a LMT state without reaching a ceiling, in which a 3-piece game and a 2-piece bet game are performed in the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect in the case of shifting to a low navigation state without reaching a ceiling, when a 3 sheet game and a 2 bet game are performed in the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect in case a 3-piece game and a 2-piece bet game are performed in the decision notification state of a high navi state, and a promotion counter is not updated. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect at the time of not performing operation navigation in the decision notification state of a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case AT1 type is promoted in the decision notification state of a high navi state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the presentation at the time of not having reached the ceiling in the decision notification state of a high navi state. It is a figure showing an example of the flow of the production at the time of reaching a ceiling in the decision notice state of a high navi state. (A) It is a figure showing an example of ED production at the time of three bet games being performed in LMT state. (B) It is a figure showing an example of ED production at the time of 2 bet game being performed in LMT state. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-1. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-2. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-3. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-4. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-5. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-6. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-7. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-8. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 1-9. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state process A which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to AT2 state process A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in said FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the judgment state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to the judgment state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in said FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of AT2 initial stage number lottery table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a flow of AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, which corresponds to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the pull back state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to the pull back state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in said FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of transfer of AT state in a high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of shifting to the normal state of a low navigation state, after a production state transfers in order of AT2 state-> judgment state-> pulling back state in a high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of shifting to the normal state of a low navigation state, after a rendering state transfers in order of AT2 state-> LMT state in a high navigation state. (A) A diagram showing the flow of effects when the effect state is shifted in the order of AT2 state → judge state → pullback state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, which is the effect of the effect described using FIG. 92 (a) It shows the continuation. (B) After the rendering state transitions in the order of AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state, transition to the normal state in the low navigation state and transition to the high navigation state again and the rendering state is the normal state → confirmation notification state → It is a figure showing the flow of the production at the time of changing in order of AT1 state, and shows the continuation of the production explained using Drawing 92 (b). (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting at the time of formation of the combination in AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting at the time of formation of the combination in LMT state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation at the time of performing correction | amendment of AT2 initial stage number. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation at the time of performing the gusset display of the number of remaining games in AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation at the time of performing the gusset display of the number of remaining games in AT2 state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation at the time of performing a result display after transfer of AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation at the time of not performing a result display after completion | finish of AT2 state, and is a figure corresponding to Fig.95 (a). It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 2-1. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 2-2. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 2-3. It is the figure which showed the state transition of PUSH button operation, arrow key operation, closing operation, and lever operation. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the various operation for performing the display switch of a normal screen and a demo screen in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of various operations in the case of performing a sound volume adjustment using a setting screen in time series. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of various operation in the case of performing volume adjustment, without displaying a setting screen in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of (D) and (E) other various operations in time series. It is the figure which showed character character operation when a production | presentation state transfers to a AT2 state from a judgment state in a high navigation state in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 5 of character character operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of character character operation in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of character character operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 7 of character character operation in time series. (C) It is the figure which showed Example 8 of character character operation in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of character character operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of character character operation in time series. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 3-1. It is a figure showing an outline of the present invention 3-2.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described using the drawings.

Embodiment 1
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, the predetermined number of game media is inserted, and a plurality of reels, each of which has a plurality of types of symbols, start rotation when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received and Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, it is determined by lottery that the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotation individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the condition determined by the combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels is stopped matches the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and ends, and the game medium is not matched. It is a game stand that advances a series of games that ends without being paid out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a game stand according to the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and openable and closable with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored inside the center of the main body 101, and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. The reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the reels 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted other than the reel. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  At the back of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is disposed. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. The light emitting portion of this optical sensor A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. The position in the rotational direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a pay line 114 to be activated.

  The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that the player has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) in a winning combination internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of this embodiment lights up until the bonus game is over after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. The notification lamp 123 may be lighted before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 122 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-play which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is insertion of the specified number of medals, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. is there.

  The stored sheet number indicator 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the gaming information display 126, and the number-of-payouts display 127 are constituted by seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout amount display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that reports information (for example, the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139) related to the stop operation.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type press switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 which have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called a stop operation, the first stop operation is a first stop operation, the next stop operation is a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is a third stop operation, the first stop The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be subjected to a second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be subjected to a third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

  Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is called “forward press operation sequence” or simply “forward press”, and the operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is “stop operation”. The reverse pressing operation order "or simply" reverse pressing ". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

  The medal return button 133 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout opening 155 is a payout opening for paying out the medals.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificates is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout port 155 and a medal receiver 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 160 is disposed on the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the top of the rendering device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163 a and a left shutter 163 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. And the effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 according to the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that reports information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  In addition, although the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 alert | reported predetermined information by light-emitting a lamp | ramp, the alerting | reporting aspect is not limited to light emission of a lamp | ramp. For example, the predetermined information may be displayed using a partial region of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, a region in the vicinity of the reels 110 to 112 or the like may be used). Hereinafter, in the case where it is described that the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is lighted, it also means that notification by another rendering device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function is included.

<Inside the case>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box which is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the side surface plate 260 on the left side, the side surface plate 260 on the right side, the lower surface plate 264 and the back surface plate 242 and is open at the front. A main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is disposed inside the main body 101 at a position not overlapping the air vent 249 provided at the upper portion of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. The first control sub board is housed in the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side board 260 on the left side, in which the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed A case 220 is provided. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out the medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower surface plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply 252 is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front of the power supply 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and in the closed state, the operation is difficult or impossible.

  The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside into a DC voltage, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and converts the AC power supply into a predetermined voltage. The controller supplies to each device. Furthermore, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 or the like of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) is provided. There is.

  The medal auxiliary storage 240 is disposed on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is disposed behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected thereto extends to the outside through the power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a rendering device 160 and a rendering control board (shown in FIG. An upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 causes illegal medals and the like to fall to the medal receiver 161, etc. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main effect according to a main control unit 300 for controlling the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery of winning combination, and stop of reels. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times etc., A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315 b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 generates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor or the like and transmission of driving pulses in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is 8 MHz, the dividing value of the counter timer 312 is 1/256, and the dividing data of the ROM 306 is 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 × 47 × 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 is activated when the power is turned on, and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. The activation signal output circuit 338 which outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when an activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later) To start).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from the various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, and medal insertion slot 141 for each interrupt time). Medal reception sensor for medal, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc. is monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing, and stores the value in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the passage of medals. Two start levers 135 sensors are provided inside the start lever 135 and detect start operations by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are provided on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as insertion medals to the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a noncontact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions of the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180 Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, and various lamps 336 (prize line display lamp 120, game medal insertable lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insert lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number indicator 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the number-of-payouts display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

  Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 has a slot for an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a predetermined voltage value of the power supply. In the configuration, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9 v) is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control A signal such as a command can not be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first secondary control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various display devices, and the like. It is provided.

  The CPU 404 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  Further, a sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first auxiliary control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 includes various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp 123 etc.) are connected.

  In addition, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

  The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second secondary control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and controls the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 every interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  The second auxiliary control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design array>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4A, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-described reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which expand | deploys and shows planarly the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (the left reel 110, the inside reel 111, the right reel 112).

  On each of the reels 110 to 112, symbols of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged for a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in this embodiment). The numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, a “bell symbol” is displayed on the frame of the number 19 of the left reel 110, a “blank pattern” is displayed on the frame of the number 19 of the middle reel 111, and “Seven 2” is displayed on the frame of the number 18 of the right reel 112. The symbols "" are arranged respectively. In the following, "seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (symbol)", and "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (symbol)".

<Paid line>
Next, the pay line will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a pay line of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.

  The symbols displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (the position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 1) are displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol and the middle of the left reel 110 (the position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 2) The symbol displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed at the lower end of the left reel 110 (the position 3 in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 3) is the left reel lower symbol, the upper end of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure Middle reel upper stage symbol, a symbol displayed on the middle step of middle reel 111 (5 positions shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5), middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower end of middle reel 111 (the position of 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is shown on the middle reel lower end symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7) Right reel upper row for displayed symbols The symbol displayed in the middle of the right reel 112 (the position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 8) is also referred to as the position below the right reel 112, the position 9 shown in the figure; The symbols displayed on) are respectively called the lower right reel symbol, and the symbols of each of the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in total in the longitudinal direction of the respective reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine. .

  In the present embodiment, one pay line 114 of the middle pay line L1 including the left reel middle design (design position 2), the middle reel middle design (design position 5) and the right reel middle design (design position 8) is provided. ing. The pay line 114 is a line set at the stop position of the symbol which can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and the symbol corresponding to the winning combination described later with reference to FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b). It is a line for which it is determined whether a combination is displayed. The middle winning line L1 is shown in FIG. 4 (b). The pay lines to be activated (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “active lines”) are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as gaming media.

  The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can play a game of 3 bets or 2 bets, and when the number of medals inserted is less than 2, any pay line is not valid, and 3 or 2 medals are made. The pay line L1 is activated when the sheet bet is made. When the pay line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

  Further, the number of pay lines is not limited to one. For example, in addition to the middle pay line L1, the left reel upper design, the middle reel middle design and the right reel lower design consisting of the left reel lower design, the left reel lower design, the middle reel middle design and the right reel upper pattern A total of three lines of up-to-right pay lines may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Type of winning combination>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B, types of winning combinations for the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including the operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the 3-piece betting game. (B) is a figure showing the type of winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two bet game.

  The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination (special combination 1 and special combination 2), a general combination (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5) and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and may be arbitrarily selected.

  Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles to shift to a special gaming state in which the player is given a predetermined profit. Also, the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 13 are roles that enable re-playing without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be called "activators". In addition, the “winning” in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without medal payout (without medal payout) is displayed on the effective line, for example, special role 1, The special role 2 and the winnings on the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 13 are included.

  The special role 1 and the special role 2 are roles (operating roles) to shift to the special game state by winning. In the present example, the special part 1 is a part that can be won only in the three bet game, and the special part 2 is a part that can be won in the two bet game. The medals will not be paid out due to the player winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is that the special character 1 (BB1) is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" and the special character 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-seven 1".

  When the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special role 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

  The flag remains on until the internal winning combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in the subsequent games. That is, even if the special combination 1 or special combination 2 does not win the special combination in the game, the special combination will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, special When the internal winning combination is won by the combination 1, the symbol combination of "seven-seven-seven 2 (BB1)" is in a state in which it is easy to achieve a prize. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of sheets (in this example, 110 for BB1 and 55 for BB2) are paid out, the re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). Transition to The special game state (RT4) and the re-game low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  "Replay role (Replay role 1 to Replay role 13)" is a winning combination (working role) that can be played without inserting medals (gaming media) in the next game by winning. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are “Replay-Replay-Replay” for Replay Role 1 (Normal Replay), “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” for Replay Role 2 (Effect Replay 1), Replay Role 3 (Effect Replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

  "Small part (small part 1 ~ small part 5)" is a winning combination where a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is small part 1 (cherry) is "ANY-Cherry-ANY", small Part 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding number of payouts is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", it is sufficient that the symbol of the middle reel 111 is "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 indicate that any symbol may be used.

<Stop control of reel>
Next, an outline of stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control selects one of a plurality of predetermined types of reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, a result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

  In the present embodiment, so-called pull-in control (coma slip control) is performed. With the pull-in control, the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 is shifted within a fixed number of symbols (number of symbols) range (maximum 4 frames here) after the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139. I say control. Reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data includes an allowable control that allows a predetermined combination of symbol combinations to be displayed on the pay line, and a prohibition control in which any combination of symbol combinations is not displayed on the pay line. It is divided roughly.

  An example in which the permission control is performed is, for example, when an internal winning is made for a certain winning combination, or during an internal winning for a special combination (while carrying a flag), and the timing at which the player operates the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is uniformly displayed within the range of the number of frames. However, since only “permit” is made, the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137-139.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is 2 for small part 2 (watermelon 1), since the watermelon pattern is disposed beyond 4 frames, if the timing for operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern is a pay line Do not stop.

  However, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn-in frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay role 1 (normal replay) is 4 frames at maximum, when the replay role 1 is internally elected, a 100% prize will be achieved regardless of the timing.

  On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, there is a case where the internal lottery result is a loss and it is not during the internal winning of the special part (while carrying the flag), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. The control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not uniformly displayed within the above-mentioned range of the number of frames even if

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a special role 1 internal winning state of replay high state, an internal winning state (RT2), and a special role 2 internal win of the replay high state. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In this embodiment, the gaming state roughly divided into four is referred to as a gaming state of the RT system. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT-based gaming state), according to the AT-based gaming state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub control unit 400 is configured to set the game state. The gaming state of the AT system will be described later using FIG. 6 (b).

  In the replay low probability state (RT1), a state in which the probability that the condition device relating to the replay role is activated has not changed (default state), special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), special combination 2 internal selection state The (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability that the condition device relating to the replay role is activated fluctuates with respect to the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

  The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random data acquired at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data corresponding to each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing the value by numerical data (for example, 65535) of a range of numerical values. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≒ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss.

  It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. In this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probability of at least one combination is made different are prepared, and a clerk or the like of the game store can arbitrarily select and set any setting value. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is the lowest (unfavorable to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, the game state excluding the special game state) the internal winning probability of re-game, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the row of “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A.

  The special winning combination 1 (conditional device No. 1. 3 betting only), special winning 2 (not shown, only 2 double betting only), and the winning combination 1 for the winning combination internally won in the re-play low probability state Condition device No. 2), Replay role 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), Replay role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), Small role 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, that the symbol combination which concerns on a prize is not stopped by a prize line may be called "it will be a loss". In addition, the fact that the player has not won the winning combination may be expressed as "the player has been won".

  Here, “replay roles 2, 4 to 10” are replay role 2, replay role 4, replay role 5, replay role 6, replay role 7, replay role 8, replay role 9, , And that the replay player 10 has been internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by the reverse press), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 2 is Displayed on the pay line, otherwise, according to the stop operation timing of each of the reels 110 to 112, replay role 4, replay role 5, replay role 6, replay role 7, replay role A symbol combination corresponding to one of 8, replay player 9, and replay player 10 is displayed on the pay line. It is to be noted that a combination in which a winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as “replay combination 2, 4 to 10” may be referred to as a “push order combination”.

  Also, "replay role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" refers to replay role 3, replay role 4, replay role 6, replay role 8, replay role 10, replay role 11 , Replay 12 and Replay 13 indicate internal winnings simultaneously. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by the reverse press), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 3 is Displayed on the pay line, otherwise, depending on the stop operation timing of each of the reels 110 to 112, replay role 4, replay role 6, replay role 8, replay role 10, replay role A symbol combination corresponding to one of 11, 11, and 12 is displayed on the pay line.

  When the internal winning of "small winning combination 4" is made, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the pay line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. a) See Remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the predetermined correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, “bell-bell-bell” is displayed on the pay line, and eleven medals are paid out ((1) Bell winning). On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the pay line (loss).

  If "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b" and the "small role 4a" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell-bell" according to the player's operation order While it is determined whether or not "is displayed on the pay line," "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order when the "small role 4b" is internally won. May be configured to

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7B, the operation order of the correct answer of “small part 4” will be described in detail. The “small role 4” is exactly six “small role 4 LCR”, “small role 4 LRC”, “small role 4 CLR”, “small role 4 CRL”, “small role 4 RLC”, and “small role 4 RCL” The operation sequence of different correct answers is assigned in correspondence with each of the subdivided "small roles 4". In addition, the range of the lottery data matched with each of the "small part 4" subdivided into six is the same.

  For example, when "small role 4 LCR" of "small role 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the second stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is set to the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operation. In addition, in the case where "small winning combination 4CRL" among "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is set as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

  FIG. 6A shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later is transitioned to. When the special winning combination 2 is internally won (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is shown that the special winning combination 2 internal winning status (RT3) to be described later is entered.

<Special part 1 internal winning state (RT2), special part 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special character internal winning state (RT2) and the special character 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1) ) Is a gaming state where the internal winning probability of the replay role is higher and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs the stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state where it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special part corresponding to this flag.

  In the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), a winning combination winning the internal selection is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the row of “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A, and the special combination 2 internal winning state ( In RT3), a winning combination for internal winning is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. The winning combination to be internally won in the special winning combination internal state, re-playing role 1, re-playing role 2, 4 to 10, re-playing role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small role 1 to small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. Further, FIG. 6A shows a special game to be described later when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied). Transition to the state (RT4) is shown.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player in all the gaming states. In the special gaming state, a winning combination for internally winning is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. In the special game state, only the small winning combination 5 is a winning combination for internal winning. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 6 (a) shows that, in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game transitions to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the game is shifted to the special game state based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special part 1 being displayed, if payout of medals exceeding 110 is performed, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Migrate to In addition, when it shifts to the special game state on the basis that the symbol combination which corresponds to special part 2 is indicated, when the payout of the medal which exceeds 55 is done, it moves to the re-game low probability state (RT1) .

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state ends when payout of a prescribed number of sheets is executed, but for example, it ends when a predetermined winning combination (for example, single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, For example, the game may be ended when there is a winning of eight times, or when a game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times). That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-type game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, the AT-type gaming state will be described. FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

  The gaming state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in the figure. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is performed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation is more likely to be executed than the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode. Here, with the operation navigation, the internal winning combination (in this example, the re-play role 2, 4 to 10, the re-play role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 or the small portion 4) In this case, it refers to the effect of informing the correct operation order. That is, the operation navigation means an effect of notifying the contents of the stop operation for medal acquisition, the contents of the stop operation for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state, and the maintenance of the advantageous gaming state.

  Here, the operation navigation will be described using FIG. 7 (b) and FIG. 8. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is performed using the number-of-payouts display 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 7B is a view for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout amount indicator 127. FIG.

  For example, the display data 01 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data that suggests the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is , And data suggesting a stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, the first stop reel is set as the right reel 112 when the player is internally elected to "replay role 2, 4 to 10" or "replay role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13". Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image The apparatus 157 displays an image (eg, the character “−−1”) indicating that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

  Further, the display data 04 is data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The display data 05 is the first stop reel Data indicating the stop operation in which the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 is the first stop reel the middle reel 111, the second stop reel Data indicating the stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, and the display data 07 indicate that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. Data indicating the stop operation for setting the reel 110, the display data 08, the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, the third Data indicating the stop operation in which the stop reel is the middle reel 112, display data 09 is the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110 Is data that suggests

  Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is won internally in AT mode, the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, the second stop reel to the left reel 110, and the third stop reel to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is in progress, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the display data 06 And the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image to be displayed (for example, the characters "213") is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout amount display 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a re-play combination or a small combination 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to 3 options like the re-play combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination can not be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, the stop operation of the correct answer of the replay role may be selected as 6 options as in the case of the small role 4, and the replay role may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Also in this case, the internal winning combination can not be determined only by the lighting mode.

  In this embodiment, the low navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is higher than the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is performed may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is performed. The high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because a favorable result is provided to the player when the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation is performed. Here, the advantage is, specifically, the total number of game media paid out by the game stand with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. It means the ratio, the so-called payout rate (payout rate).

  In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than the loss), the state transitions to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6C, for example, transition is made in the order of finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and from this judge state, transition is made to the normal game state or the AT2 state via the pullback state. There are a route and a route to shift directly to the AT2 state from the judge state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games, etc.) of the number of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is given. Further, although details will be described later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<State transition of AT system>
FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an effect state in each AT-type gaming state. Each gaming state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 6B, and this is called a rendering state. More specifically, the rendering state in the low navigation state is the normal state, and the rendering state in the high navigation state is the normal state, the confirmation notification state, the judge state, the pullback state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls is increased.

  Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games in the high navigation state or less, that is, the effect state from the 981th game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (981 to 1000 games in the high navigation state) The effect state of may not be the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the high navi state is 20 games or less, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “ED effect”) is executed to indicate the end of the high navi state.

<Effect table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A illustrates an image of the effect table provided in the first sub control unit 400. An effect table provided for each effect state is stored in the storage means (for example, the ROM 406 and the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub control unit 400 performs effect information (for example, a rendering state, a high navigation state counter, and the like) included in a command received from the main control unit 300 in command processing (step S3604) of the first sub control unit main processing described later. The effect status counter etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control processing (step S3605), an effect according to the effect status counter etc. is performed with reference to the effect table corresponding to the effect status etc. For example, if the current rendering state is the AT1 state, processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 the effect data for executing the AT1 rendering to be described later with reference to the rendering table (AT1 state rendering table) corresponding to the AT1 state When the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  If the current rendering state is the judge state, processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 the effect data for executing the judgment effect to be described later with reference to the effect table (judge state effect table) corresponding to the judge state When the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is a judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, a judgment state effect table as shown in FIG. Judge effect corresponding to the point and effect state counter is performed.

  Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIG. 9 (b) (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is A → A → A → B (the expectation is A A judgment effect of changing in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judgment effect of changing the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. When effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIG. 9 (b) (2), when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judgment state is N), the effect mode is D1. Perform a judge effect that changes in the order of -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 → ..., and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judgment state is N-1), the effect mode is displayed. A judgment effect of changing in the order of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 →... Is performed.

  In addition, when the current rendering state is in the LMT state, processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 the rendering data for executing the LMT rendering to be described later with reference to the rendering table (LMT state rendering table) corresponding to the LMT state When the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  FIG.9 (c) is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state presentation table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (such as the start condition and the end condition of the effect) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the effect corresponding to the counter is performed.

  Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. 9 (c) (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135 9 (c) (2) using the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 9 (c) (2) according to the current setting value from among a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading out effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and a setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

  In addition, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. From the plurality of types of effects B1 to B10, a predetermined effect is selected according to the current setting value, and processing such as reading out effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and a setting suggestion effect B Execute (for example, a background image of the end screen).

  Further, although the details will be described later, when performing control to continuously display a specific scene (not to display the subsequent scene) in the interlocking production at the time of the two bet game, the main control unit 300 performs an effect state Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. In addition, the method of control which displays a specific scene continuously in interlocking production (it does not display a subsequent scene) is not limited to this example, For example, interlocking | links from the main control part 300 to the 1st sub control part 400 You may comprise so that the command for displaying the subsequent scene in presentation may not be transmitted.

  In addition, the effect aspect, the type, the determination method and the like of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and for example, as shown in FIG. 9D, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in LMT state) Thus, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower than when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is smaller.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 10 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initialization of the I / O 310, initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation allowance to the WDT 314 and initialization Set the value etc.

  In step S102, a bet number setting / start operation acceptance process (described in detail later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not the medal has been inserted, and preparation for the transmission of the insertion command indicating that the medal has been inserted is performed. In the case where the player plays a winning combination in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is inserted, so that the player does not need to insert the medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 is operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a pay line determination process of determining a valid pay line is performed.

  In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of the internal lottery is shown. Preparation for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination is made to any winning combination (including the operating combination), the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

  In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In step S105, preparation for transmitting a reel stop data command including information on the selected reel stop data to the first sub control unit 400 is performed.

  In step S106, effect control processing A (details will be described later) related to control of the AT system gaming state is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, an effect process is performed. In this process for effect, control of freeze effect etc. is performed.

  Here, the freeze effect is an effect that makes it seem that the originally intended effect has been interrupted halfway, an effect that makes the slot machine seem to be unresponsive, and so on. Furthermore, for light emission, for example, stop of the change of the lighting mode is referred to as freeze, for sound output, for example, it is referred to as freeze that the same sound continues to be outputted forever, and for operation, for example, the operation is halfway Stopping may be referred to as freezing.

  In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

  In step S109, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, reception of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes possible, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is stopped to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. By referring to it, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn-in frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 stop, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, stop button reception commands related to the stop buttons 137 to 139 subjected to the stop operation for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation Prepares to transmit the stop button acceptance 2 command and the stop button acceptance 3 command) for the third stop operation to the first sub control unit 400, and the reels are stopped for the stop of each reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position of the reel (specifically, for the first stop reel, the reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, the reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, the reel stop) 3) are prepared to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S110, a prize determination process is performed to determine a prize. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "BELL-BELL-BELL" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small winning combination 3 (BELL) is won. Further, in this step S110, preparation for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub control unit 400 is performed.

  In step S111, a medal giving process is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player has won a winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of pay lines.

  In step S112, a game state control process is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing relating to the transition of each gaming state of the RT system is performed, and the gaming state is transitioned by the establishment of the start condition or the termination condition. In addition, preparation is made to transmit a game state command including information indicating the current RT system game state.

  In step S113, effect control processing B (details will be described later) related to control of the AT system gaming state is executed. In step S114, high navigation state end processing (details will be described later) regarding the end of the high navigation state is executed.

  One game ends by the above. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S2001, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S2003, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of the sensor circuit 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is divided for each of the various sensors 318. It stores in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and a process corresponding to the interrupt status is executed. In step S2005, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, the various timers are updated in each time unit.

  In step S2006, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S2007, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S2003, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal discharge abnormality is monitored, and an error is detected. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, in accordance with the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker on which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S2009, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

  In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interruption end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the respective original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S2011, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure upon recovery from power as recovery data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of first sub control unit>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 12B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400.

  First, the main processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is turned on, first, in step S3001, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information indicating the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information indicating a gaming state, are respectively provided in the RAM 408.

  In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300 is executed.

  In step S3005, an effect control process is performed. Here, preparation for rendering is performed in accordance with the rendering reservation information in the rendering reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading out the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing processing of updating the effect data when it is necessary to update the effect data.

  In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when there is an instruction for various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set to transmit a command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S3005. For example, when there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S3002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 12 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 12C. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 12A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, transmission of a command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S3009, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

<Process of second sub control unit>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S4001, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, input / output port initialization, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, initialization processing of a storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

  In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S4005, an effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing for reading out effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. Further, processing such as reading out effect data other than this from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, updating processing of the effect data is performed.

  In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result in step S4005. For example, when an instruction for image control is included in the effect data read out in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notice image, background image) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S4002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 13A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Accordingly, in step S4002, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more. In step S4202, an update process of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13D, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. The figure is a figure which shows the flowchart which shows the flow of image control processing.

  In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303, otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for

  In step S4303, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc. are indicated to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input.

  In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Betting number setting / start operation reception processing>
Next, bet number setting / start operation acceptance processing will be described using FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process of step S102 of FIG.

  In step S201, the high navigation state update process (described in detail later) regarding the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state and the update of the high navigation state is executed in the medal injection enable state before the start lever operation.

  In step S202, other bet number setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the bet number is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation state update process>
Next, the high navigation state update processing will be described using FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14 (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of FIG. 14 (a).

  In step S301, it is determined whether high navigation state counter> 0. If the high navigation state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S302. If not, the high navigation state update process is terminated. In step S302, the value of the high navigation state counter is decremented by one.

  In step S303, it is determined whether the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the AT system gaming state is high navigation state, and indicates a high navigation state if it is on, and indicates a low navigation state if it is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304. If not, the high navigation state update process is ended.

  In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In the present embodiment, in the game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is decided, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter (see step S703 in FIG. 16B described later). When the start lever of the next game is operated, the state changes to the high navigation state. In addition, the high navigation state lamp 190 starts lighting by turning on the high navigation state flag.

<Effect state control processing A>
Next, the rendering state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.15 (a) is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production | presentation state control processing A of FIG.10 S106.

  In step S401, each game common processing (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the processing related to the high navigation state is to be executed in the high navigation state, and the game related to the high navigation state can be executed when the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is on, it indicates that the game is not to execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the process inhibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403. If not, that is, if the process inhibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S403, it is determined whether the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404. If the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S404, since it is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing A (described in detail later) is executed. In step S405, since the high navigation state is in progress, high navigation state processing A (described in detail later) is executed. In step S406, other effect state control processing A is executed.

  In the effect state control process A of the present embodiment, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed only when the process prohibition flag is provided and the process prohibition flag is off, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. May be In this case, low navigation state processing A or high navigation state processing A is always performed in the presentation state control processing A.

<Each game common processing>
Next, each game common processing will be described using FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15 (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of each-game common processing in step S401 of FIG. 15 (a).

  In step S501, it is determined whether the conditions for executing the high navigation state related process are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state related process is that the game is a recommended number game (in this example, a three bet game). The recommended number game is not limited to the three-piece game, and the recommended number game may be different for each state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, when the condition for executing the high navigation state related process is satisfied (for example, in the case where the game is a three bet game), the process proceeds to step S502, otherwise (for example, for example If the game is a bet game, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S502, the process prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the process prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, another game common process is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the game common processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG.

  In step S601, a high navigation state transition process (described in detail later) is executed to determine whether to transition to the high navigation state. In step S602, another low navigation state process A is executed.

<High navigation state transition process>
Next, the high navigation state transition process will be described using FIG. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition processing in step S601 of FIG.

  In step S701, the high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition judgment, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when a prize combination other than the winner is won in the internal winning combination lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied. It decides to shift from the game to the high navigation state.

  In step S702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state transition has been determined, and if so, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition processing is ended.

  In step S703, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1000, and may be 1500, for example. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games of various games to be executed after transition to the high navigation state is set, and, for example, an initial value (700 in this example) is set as the value of the ceiling counter.

  In step S701, in the high navigation state transition determination, the transition to the high navigation state is determined when winning a winning combination other than the loss, but the high navigation transition condition is not limited to this, for example, random number value The transition to the high navigation state may be determined based on the result of the drawing used, or the drawing is performed using the drawing value provided for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state is performed based on the drawing result You may decide

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state process A of step S405 of FIG. 15 (a).
In step S801, high navigation state common processing (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a normal state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S803, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, normal state processing A (described in detail later) is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state process A, for example, a counter related to the number of games in the effect state (predictive state) is subtracted. In addition, the effect setting according to the result of the internal winning combination lottery process is performed on the game.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a finalized state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S805, a confirmation notification state process A (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a judge state. If it is, the process proceeds to step S809. If it is not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, a judgment state process A (described in detail later) is performed.

  In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state. If it is, the process proceeds to step S811. If it is not the case, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, a judgment state process A (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a pullback state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, a pullback state process A (described in detail later) is performed.

  In step S814, instruction information setting processing (details will be described later) related to setting of instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common process A will be described using FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state common processing A of step S801 in FIG.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter> 0. If the effect state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S902. If not, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, the value of the effect state counter is decremented by one. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing transition of the effect state. In addition, when determining the number of games in each effect state by lottery or table, etc., the value of the effect state counter may be set to the numerical value acquired from the result of the lottery or the table, etc. When the game is played, the number of games in a part or all of the presentation state may be determined collectively.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is less than or equal to the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), and if so, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20 G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20 G-1 G), but may be another numerical value.

  In step S905, it is determined whether the value of the difference sheet counter is less than or equal to the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example). If it does, the process proceeds to step S906. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S906. Go to S909. In this example, the LMP state is configured to be 20 G, the maximum number of payouts in three bet game is 11 sheets (maximum increase number is 8 sheets), and the high navigation state is ended when the difference sheet number exceeds 2000 sheets. In order to do this, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets−8 sheets × 20 G), but another numerical value may be used.

  In step S906, an LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various pieces of information for performing freeze effect) is set. In step S908, after the LMT state is set to the effect state, the process proceeds to step S909. Thus, the rendering state shifts from the game to the LMT state. In this example, the LMT initial value is set to 19 (= 20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but another numerical value may be used.

  In step S 909, after executing the other high navigation state common processing A, the high navigation state common processing A ends.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state process A of step S803 of FIG.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter is> 0, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by one. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In the present embodiment, the ceiling counter is set to the initial value (700 in this example) in step S 705 of the high navigation state transition processing described with reference to FIG. May be

  In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If it does, the process proceeds to step S1007. If it does not, the process proceeds to step 1005. In step S1005, an AT1 shift lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 transition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT1 state, and in this example, the success or failure is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the random value, and the like. In addition, the contents of the AT1 transition lottery are not limited to this example, and may be determined based on the value of the high navigation state counter, etc., for example, or the points may be determined based on the result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination. May be awarded, and whether or not it is acceptable may be determined based on the points.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won, and if it has been won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if it has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, it is determined to be “high” or “low” based on a random number value or the like. The content of the AT1 type lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, “high” is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when the AT1 transition lottery is won rather than the lottery when reaching the ceiling The configuration may be easy (or difficult to select).

  In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set as the AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. In step S1010, after the AT1 winning flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if so, the process proceeds to step S1012, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1014. In step S1012, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1014, a judge mode lottery is performed. Here, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the judge modes from among a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types of “normal”, “high probability”, and “heaven”). In the present example, the judge mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1015, after the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1014 is set to the judge mode, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1106, after performing other normal state processing A, the normal state processing A ends.

<Confirmed Notification State Processing A>
Next, the determination notification state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process A in step S805 in FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether the AT1 type is "low". If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it is not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1107. In step S1102, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1103, after the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value (for example, 700). If it does, the process proceeds to step S1105. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1105, "high" is set as the AT1 type, and in the next step S1106, "high probability" is set in the judge mode, and the process proceeds to step S1109.

  In step S1107, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining any of the judge modes from among a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types: "normal", "high probability", and "heaven"). In the present example, the judge mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1108, after the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1107 is set to the judge mode, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, after performing the other determination notification state processing A, the determination notification state processing A ends.

<AT1 state process A>
Next, the AT1 state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state process A of step S807 of FIG.

  In step S1201, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining any of the judge modes from among a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types: "normal", "high probability", and "heaven"). In the present example, the judge mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1202, after the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1201 is set to the judge mode, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after performing the other AT1 state process A, the AT1 state process A ends.

<Judge status processing A>
Next, the judgment state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state process A in step S809 of FIG.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether the release counter> 0. If the release counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1302, the value of the release counter is decremented by one. Here, the cancellation counter is a counter for managing the number of games until the judgment mode is canceled. In the present embodiment, the lottery value is set in the release counter in step S2104 of the AT1 state process B described later, but other numerical values may be used. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the release counter = 0. If the release counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1306. If not, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1304, the cancellation lottery according to the judge mode is performed, and in the next step S1305, if the cancellation lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. . Here, the cancellation lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to shift to the AT2 state. In this example, if the judge mode is heaven and the release lottery is won, the judge mode heaven is continued without shifting to the AT2 state. In addition, if the judge mode is heaven and the player is internally elected to a specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role 3 in this example), AT2 has a 100% probability regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery. Transition to the state. The content of the cancellation lottery is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a lottery for determining whether to shift to a certain specialized zone.

  In step S1306, the determined state is set in the judge state, and then the process proceeds to step S1307. In this example, if it is determined in step S1303 that the release counter = 0 (if the heaven in the judge mode ends), the AT2 state is set in the judge state in step S1306. That is, in this example, when the judgment mode heaven ends, the state shifts to the AT2 state with a probability of 100%. In addition, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and the release lottery is won, the judge mode is set in the judge state. In addition, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and the internal winning is made to a specific rare combination (in this example, small combination 2 or small combination 3), regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery, In step S1306, the AT2 state is set to the judge state.

  In step S1307, after performing other judgment state processing A, the AT1 state processing A ends.

<AT2 state process A>
Next, AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state process A of step S811 in FIG.

  In step S1401, an AT number addition lottery is performed. Here, the AT number addition lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games to be added (added) to the number of AT games. In step S1402, a lottery result value (number of games to be added) of the AT number addition lottery is added to the effect state counter.

  In step S1403, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining any of the judge modes from among a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types: "normal", "high probability", and "heaven"). In the present example, the judge mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1403, after the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1401 is set to the judge mode, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, after performing the other AT2 state process A, the AT2 state process A ends.

<Withdrawal state processing A>
Next, the pullback state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process A of step S813 in FIG.

  In step S1501, a withdrawal lottery is performed, and in step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the withdrawal lottery is won. If it is won, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if it is not won, the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1503, the determined state is set in the pullback state. In this example, the lottery result of the pulling back lottery in step S1501 is set to the pulling back state. In step S1504, after performing other pull back state processing A, the pull back state processing A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, instruction information setting processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process of step S814 of FIG.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether the effect state is a state in which instruction information can be notified. Here, the instruction information informing possible state indicates an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT state in this example. If the effect state is the instruction information informing possible state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if not, the instruction information setting process is ended.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination has been won in the internal winning lottery process. In this example, the pushing order means the internal winning of "small order 4" in the condition device. If the internal winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the instruction information setting process is ended.

  In step S1603, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification. As a result, operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 is executed (see FIG. 8). Although illustration is omitted, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, preparation is made to transmit an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the pressing order of the correct answer to the first sub control unit 400. As a result, the first subsidiary control unit 400 executes operation navigation using the effect image display device 157.

  Note that, in the finalized notification state of this example, since the medals continue to decrease until the small winning combination corresponding to the AT1 type wins, for example, it is possible to ensure that the payout rate is less than 1; When the internal winning is performed, the operation navigation is performed in a specific type of push order (for example, when the small winning combination 4 is internally selected, any one of the small winning combination 4 LCR, ..., the small winning combination 4 RCL or The operation navigation may be performed for a plurality of operations, or the operation navigation may be performed at a rate of once every three times (for example, when the winning order can not be won three times, the next pressing order) The push order navigation may be executed at the time of the internal winning of the winning combination).

<Effect state control processing B>
Next, the rendering state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing B in step S113 of FIG.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether the processing prohibition flag is off. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, it is determined whether the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, if the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In step S1703, the low navigation state process B is executed because the low navigation state is in progress. Although illustration is omitted, in the low navigation state process B, when the transition to the high navigation state is determined, processing etc. is performed to set the rendering state based on the information on each rendering state.

  On the other hand, in step S1704, since the high navigation state is in progress, high navigation state processing B (described in detail later) is executed. In step S1705, after the other rendering state control processing B is executed, the rendering state control processing B ends.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state process B of step S1704 of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether the effect state is normal or not. If the result is true, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if the effect state is not true, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, normal state processing B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether the effect state is a finalized state or not. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1804. If not, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S 1804, a confirmation notification state process B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1805, it is determined whether the rendering state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, an AT1 state process B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a judge state. If the result is true, the process proceeds to step S1808. If the effect state is not true, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1808, a judge state process B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state process B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state. If the result is true, the process proceeds to step S1812. If the effect state is not the false, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, a pullback state process B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1813, after executing the LMT state process B (described in detail later), the high navigation state process B ends.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state process B of step S1802 of FIG.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether the effect state counter = 0 (whether the normal state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, after the finalized state is set to the effect state, the process proceeds to step S1903. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the confirmation notification state, and the effect (for example, bonus confirmation display) corresponding to the confirmation notification state is started. In step S1903, after performing other normal state processing B, the normal state processing B ends.

<Confirmed Notification State Processing B>
Next, the determination notification state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process B in step S1804 of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether the confirmation notification flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after the confirmation notification flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2003, it is determined whether it is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

  Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether the internal winning result is “replay combination 2, 4 to 10” of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is If the result is high, it is determined whether the internal winning result is “replay role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13” of the condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, when it corresponds, it progresses to step S2004, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to step S2006.

  In step S2004, the AT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2005, after the AT1 state is set in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2006. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the finalized state to the AT1 state, and the effect (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the AT1 state is started. In the present embodiment, the initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2004, but may be another numerical value. In step S2006, after performing the other determination notification state processing B, the determination notification state processing B ends.

<AT1 state process B>
Next, the AT1 state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state process B of step S1806 of FIG.

  In step S 2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether the state AT 1 has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2102. If not, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2102, an initial judgment value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2102, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if so, the process proceeds to step S2104. If not, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2104, after the lottery value (number of games) determined by lottery is set in the release counter, the process proceeds to step 2105. Although the content of the lottery in step S2104 is not particularly limited, in this example, the higher the set value, the smaller the value selected, and when there is a stock in the heaven mode, the smaller value is selected and the value of the high navigation state counter is smaller. It is configured such that a smaller number is selected.

  In step S2105, after setting the judge state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2106. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2106, after performing the other AT1 state process B, the AT1 state process B ends.

<Judge status processing B>
Next, the judgment state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state process B in step S1808 of FIG.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the judgment state is determined (whether or not the judgment is successful). If the judgment is YES, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2202, an AT2 initial number drawing is performed. This AT2 number initial stage number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is randomly selected. As an exception, when the set value is set 5, 55 is selected independently of the lottery, and when the set value is set 6, 66 is selected independently of the lottery.

  In step S2203, after the lottery value (number of games) of the AT2 initial number lottery is set in the effect state counter, the process proceeds to step 2204. In step S2204, the AT2 state is set to the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2208. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started.

  In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the judge state has ended). If yes, the process proceeds to step S2206, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2206, a pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2207, the pullback state is set to the effect state. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the withdrawal state, and the effect corresponding to the withdrawal state is started.

  In the present embodiment, the initial value of withdrawal (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2206, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, it may be a fixed value other than 1 or 1 + α (variation value). In step S2208, after performing other judgment state processing B, the judgment state processing B ends.

<AT2 state process B>
Next, the AT2 state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state process B in step S1810 of FIG.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether the AT2 state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2302, a judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2302, but another numerical value may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if so, the process proceeds to step S2304. If not, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2304, a lottery value (number of games) determined by lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2305. Although the content of the lottery in step S2304 is not particularly limited, in this example, a higher numerical value is selected as the setting value is higher, and a smaller numerical value is selected when there is a stock in the heaven mode, and the value of the high navigation state counter is small. It is configured such that a smaller number is selected.

  In step S2305, after setting the judge state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2306. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2306, after performing the other AT2 state process B, the AT2 state process B ends.

<Withdrawal state processing B>
Next, the pullback state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process B of step S1812 of FIG.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state = confirmed (whether pullback is to be performed). If yes, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2402, an AT2 initial number drawing is performed. This AT2 number initial stage number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is randomly selected. As an exception, when the set value is set 5, 55 is selected independently of the lottery, and when the set value is set 6, 66 is selected independently of the lottery.

  In step S2404, after the AT2 state is set in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2407. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the withdrawal state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started. In the present embodiment, in the first hit (transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state to the first AT state after transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state), the rendering state is shifted to AT1, while in the judge state or pullback state The effect state is configured to shift to AT2 that is more advantageous to the player than AT1.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter = 0 (whether the pullback state has ended). If yes, the process proceeds to step S2406. If not, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2406, after the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, after performing other pull back state processing B, the pull back state processing B ends.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the LMT state process B of step S 1813 of FIG.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether the LMT state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state process B is ended. In step S2502, after setting the high navigation state end standby flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after performing the other LMT state process B, the LMT state process B ends.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end process of step S114 of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether the high navigation state flag is on. If the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2602, and if not, the high navigation state termination process is ended. In step S2602, it is determined whether the high navigation state end waiting flag is on. If the high navigation state end standby flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2603. If not, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2603, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2604, it is determined whether the value of the high navigation state counter is zero. This corresponds to the case in which the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned on when there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on. It is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2605.

  In step S2605, it is determined whether or not difference sheet counter> high navigation state end maximum value. If yes, the process advances to step S2606; otherwise, the high navigation state finish processing is ended. This is because, in the case where there is a game with the processing prohibition flag ON, there may be a case where the condition of difference sheet counter> high navigation state end maximum value is satisfied before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned on. It corresponds to the case.

  In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 which has been lit is turned off. In step S2607, after the other high navigation state end processing is executed, the high navigation state termination processing is ended. In the other high navigation state end processing, for example, processing to set the gaming state of the AT system to the low navigation state (normal mode) or initialize various flags and counters used for the transition control of the high navigation state, etc. Do.

<Normal State Processing A (Modified Example 1)>
Next, normal state processing A according to the first modification will be described using FIG. FIG. 36 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 19 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A according to the first modification. The same processes as in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19 are denoted by the same reference numerals in the figure, and the description thereof is omitted.

  A normal state process A according to the first modification is a process in which the processes of steps S1012 to S1013 are deleted and the processes of steps S1021 to S1025 are added to the normal state process A described with reference to FIG.

  Step S1021 is processing executed when it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 in step S1004, but in the present example, processing to set a ceiling arrival flag on is executed in step S1021.

  Step S1022 is processing executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is "low", but in this example, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on in step S1022 In the case, the process proceeds to step S 1023, and in the case where it does not apply, the process proceeds to step S 1016. In step S1023, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If it is, the process proceeds to step S1024. If it is not the case, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1024, "high" is set as the AT1 type, and in the next step S1025, after the judge mode is set to "high probability", the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19, the AT1 type is set to "low" or "high" when reaching the ceiling in the normal state, and after transitioning to the confirmation notification state, the AT1 type is changed from "low" to "high" To be promoted to On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and the AT1 type is "low" when the ceiling counter becomes 0. In addition to being promoted to "high", it is configured to set the judge mode with high accuracy.

<Normal State Processing A (Modification 2)>
Next, normal state processing A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 19 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A according to the second modification. The same processing as the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19 and the normal state processing A (modification 1) described with reference to FIG. Do.

  The normal state process A according to the second modification deletes the processes of steps S1012 to S1013 from the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19 and performs the processes of steps S1021 to S1025 and the processes of steps S1031 to S1032 Is added.

  Step S1031 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1022 that the ceiling arrival flag is on, but in this example, after the promotion counter addition lottery is performed in step S1031, in the next step S1032 After the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In the normal state process A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and the AT1 type is changed from "low" to "high" when the ceiling counter becomes 0. Along with promoting it, it was configured to set the judge mode with high accuracy. On the other hand, in the normal state process A according to the second modification, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" and the judge mode is set with high accuracy. It is the same as in the point that it is configured, but furthermore, the state is managed using the promotion counter, and if the value of the promotion counter is more than the ceiling value, it is configured to promote AT1 type from "low" to "high" There is.

<Confirmed Notification State Process A (Modified Example 1)>
Next, the finalized notification state process A according to the modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to the first modification. The same processes as in the definite notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 are denoted by the same reference numerals in the figure, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The finalized notification state process A according to the first modification is the same as the finalized state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 except that the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 are deleted and the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 are added. .

  In step S1120, it is determined whether the ceiling counter> 0. If it is determined that the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1121. If not, the process proceeds to step S1101. In step S1121, the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by one.

  Step S1123 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is "low", but in this example, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on in step S1123, which is applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1124, and in the case where it does not apply, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1124, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If it does, the process proceeds to step S1125. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1125, the ceiling flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In the confirmation notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, after transitioning to the confirmation notification state, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high”. On the other hand, in the finalized notification state process A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized state, the AT 1 In addition to promoting the type from "low" to "high", it is configured to set the judge mode highly accurately.

<Confirmed Notification State Process A (Modified Example 2)>
Next, the finalized notification state process A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to the second modification. The same processes as in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process A (modification 2) described with FIG. 38 are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIG. Is omitted.

  The finalized notification state process A according to the second modification is the same as the finalized state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 except that the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 are deleted, and the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 and steps S1131 to S1131 are performed. S1133 is added.

  Step S1131 is processing executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is "low", but in this example, after the promotion counter addition lottery is executed in step S1131, the next step S1132 is performed. After adding the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery to the promotion counter, the process proceeds to step S1133. In step S1133, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1123.

  In the finalized notification state process A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and the AT1 type is “low” when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized state. Configured to be promoted to high. On the other hand, in the finalized notification state process A according to the second modification, when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized state, the same is applied to promote the AT1 type from “low” to “high”. Furthermore, if the promotion counter is used to manage the state and the value of the promotion counter is higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" while the value of the promotion counter is less than the ceiling value In addition, when the ceiling counter is 0, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high".

<Confirmation Notification State Processing A and Confirmation Notification State Processing B (Modification 3)>
Next, the decision notification state process A and the decision notification state process B according to the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to the third modification. Further, FIG. 41 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 29 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process B according to the third modification. The same steps as in the finalized state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized state process B described with reference to FIG. 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals in the figure, and the description thereof is omitted.

  A finalized notification state process A according to the third modification shown in FIG. 40 is obtained by adding the process of step S1140 to the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. Step S1140 is processing executed when it is determined in step S1104 that the promotion counter is greater than or equal to the ceiling value. However, in step S1140, after the promotion flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S1109.

  A definite notification state process B according to the third modification shown in FIG. 41 is obtained by adding the process of steps S2010 to S2012 to the definite notification state process B described with reference to FIG. Step S2010 is processing executed when it is determined in step S2001 that the confirmation notification flag is on, but in step S2010, it is determined whether the promotion flag is on or off, and in the case of on, step S2011. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2011, it is determined whether the promotion notification is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2012, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2012, after the promotion notification is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In the final notice state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalize state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, since the promotion counter is not added when the AT1 type is “low”, the AT1 type promotion and the condition device No. 4 internal win was configured not to occur simultaneously. On the other hand, in the final announcement state process A and the final announcement state process B according to the third modification, the AT1 type promotion and the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 can be simultaneously generated, while the simultaneously generated game is AT1. It is configured not to shift to the state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent simultaneous execution of the operation navigation and the promotion effect at the time of promotion of the AT1 type, so that only the promotion effect can be firmly shown to the player, which enhances the player's interest There are times when you can.

  When normal state processing A according to the first modification described with reference to FIG. 36 or normal state processing A according to the second modification described with reference to FIG. And internal condition winning of condition device No. 4 may occur at the same time, but in this case, as in the third modification, the promotion flag is used to prevent transition to the AT1 state in the game generated simultaneously. Just do it.

<Modification of Embodiment 1>
Next, a slot machine according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail using the drawings. In addition, in order to avoid the redundant description, only the configuration different from the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described in principle. The symbols shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are basically used only for the description of the modification of the first embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in the other drawings, the first embodiment In the description of the modification, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are given priority.

<Type of winning combination>
First, with reference to FIG. 42, types of winning combinations for the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations, and operations or payouts of the winning combinations.

  The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination (special combination 1) and a general combination (replay combination 1 to reproduction combination 3 and small combination 1 to small combination 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and may be arbitrarily selected.

  Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination to shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is provided to the player. Also, the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 3 are roles that enable re-playing without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be called "activators". In addition, the “winning” in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without medal payout (without medal payout) is displayed on the effective line, for example, special role 1 and The prizes for the re-play role 1 to the re-play role 3 are included.

  The special part 1 is a part (operating part) to shift to a special game state by winning. The medals will not be paid out due to the player winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR-BAR-BAR".

  When the special winning combination 1 is internally elected, a special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2).

  The flag remains on until the internal winning combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in the subsequent games. That is, even if the special combination 1 is internally won, even if it does not win the special combination, the special combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (in this example, "BAR- The symbol combination of "BAR-BAR" is in a state in which it is easy to win. The special combination internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number (300 in this example) of payout is paid, the game is shifted to a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special game state (RT3) and the re-game low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  “Replay role (Replay role 1 to Replay role 3)” is a winning combination (working role) that can be played without inserting medals (gaming media) in the next game by winning. No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combinations are “Replay-Replay-Replay (Normal Replay)” for Replay Role 1, “Bell-Replay-Replay (Promotion Replay)” for Replay Role 2, and “Replay-Replay Role 3”. Replay-Bell (fall Replay 2) ".

  "Small part (small part 1 ~ small part 3)" is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is small part 1 is "ANY-Cherry-ANY" and small part 2 is "Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon 1)", the minor role 3 is "bell-bell-bell (bell)". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", it is sufficient that the symbol of the middle reel 111 is "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 indicate that any symbol may be used. In addition, since the watermelon pattern is disposed beyond 4 frames when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is won internally, if the timing for operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern is a pay line Do not stop.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and changes of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 43 (a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention can be roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state (RT4), and a special combination internal winning state (RT2). , And has a special gaming state (RT3). In this embodiment, the gaming state roughly divided into four is referred to as a gaming state of the RT system. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT-based gaming state), according to the AT-based gaming state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub control unit 400 is configured to set the game state. The gaming state of the AT system will be described later using FIG. 43 (b).

  In addition, the re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the operation probability of the condition device relating to the re-play combination is not changed (default state), re-play high probability state (RT4), special combination internal winning state (RT2) And the special gaming state (RT3) are also states in which the probability that the condition device relating to the replay role is activated fluctuates with respect to the above-mentioned default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the internal lottery process of a winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

  The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random data acquired at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data corresponding to each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing the value by numerical data (for example, 65535) of a range of numerical values. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≒ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss.

  It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. In this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probability of at least one combination is made different are prepared, and a clerk or the like of the game store can arbitrarily select and set any setting value. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is the lowest (unfavorable to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, the game state excluding the special game state) the internal winning probability of re-game, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, a winning combination for internally winning is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 43 (a).

  In the winning combination to be internally elected in the re-play low probability state, special combination 1, special combination 1 + small combination 1, special combination 1 + small combination 2, re-play combination 1, re-play combination 1 + re-play combination 2, small combination 1, There are a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, that the symbol combination which concerns on a prize is not stopped by a prize line may be called "it will be a loss". In addition, the fact that the player has not won the winning combination may be expressed as "the player has been won".

  Here, "special role 1 + small role 1" indicates that the special role 1 and the small role 1 are internally elected at the same time. Similarly, "special role 1 + small role 2" indicates that special role 1 and small role 2 were internally elected at the same time. In these cases, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to any one of the combinations is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player. More specifically, as long as it is not possible to win a prize in any of the winning lines in any of the pay lines, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the pay line are stopped.

  Also, “replay role 1 + replay role 2” indicates that the replay role 1 and the replay role 2 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (promotional replay) corresponding to the replay role 2 is displayed on the pay line (see FIG. a) In the remarks column, refer to the pressing order correct answer), otherwise, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay player 1 is displayed on the pay line (FIG. 44 (a) remarks column) , Push order incorrect reference time)).

  As in the case of "re-playing role 1 + re-playing role 2", a role in which a winning combination is determined by the operation order may be referred to as a "push order".

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation sequence of the correct answer of “replay part 1 + replay part 2” will be described in detail. FIG. 44 (b) is a view for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing regular in this embodiment.

  "Replay role 1 + Replay role 2" is precisely divided into three, "Replay role 2L", "Replay role 2C", and "Replay role 2R". A different correct operation sequence is assigned to each of the subdivided "replay role 1 + replay role 2" in correspondence. In addition, the range of the lottery data matched with each of "re-play combination 1 + re-play combination 2" subdivided into three is the same.

  For example, when “replay role 2L” of “replay role 1 + replay role 2” is internally elected, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110 is the correct operation, and other than that The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “replay role 2C” is internally elected among “replay role 1 + replay role 2”, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and other than that The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “replay role 2R” is internally elected among “replay role 1 + replay role 2”, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112 is the correct operation, and other than that The stop operation is an incorrect operation.

  So far, "Replay 1 + Replay 2" in FIG. 44 (a) has been described, but "Small Play 3a" is also a winning combination in which the winning combinations differ according to the operation order of the player.

  When the internal winning combination of "small winning combination 3a" is made, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (bell) is displayed on the pay line according to the operation order of the player is determined (FIG. a) See Remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the predetermined correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, “bell-bell-bell” is displayed on the pay line, and eleven medals are paid out ((1) Bell winning). On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the pay line (loss).

  On the other hand, when the internal winning combination of "small part 3b" is made, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order, and eleven medals are paid out. (Refer to FIG. 44 (a) remarks column).

  Here, using FIG. 44 (b), the operation sequence of the correct answer for “small part 3 a” will be described in detail.

  "Small part 3a" is exactly six in "small part 3LCR", "small part 3LRC", "small part 3CLR", "small part 3CRL", "small part 3RLC" and "small part 3RCL" It is subdivided and set, and different correct operation sequences are assigned to correspond to each of the subdivided "small part 3a". In addition, the range of the lottery data matched with each of the "small part 3a" subdivided into six is the same.

  For example, when "small role 3 LCR" of "small role 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the second stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is set to the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operation. In addition, in the case where the "small winning combination 3CRL" of the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stopping reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation. The "small part 3a" and the "small part 3b" described here are the same in the gaming state described below.

  In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (A) is satisfied in the re-game low probability state (RT1), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play role 2 is displayed on the activated line (re-play) In the case of winning a winning combination 2), it is shown that the game shifts to a re-game high probability state (RT2) described later. Further, in the figure, when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, transition to a special combination internal winning state (RT3) described later is shown. ing. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed on the activated line (when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is won), It is shown that it shifts to the special game state (RT4) mentioned later.

  In the present embodiment, although the small winning combination 3a as the pushing bonus is a single winning combination, it may be a double winning combination winning simultaneously with other small winning combinations. When the first to third stop operations are performed according to the correct operation order, the point for winning the small winning combination 3 is the same.

  For example, when set as "small part 3 + small part A + small part B" and (1) correct stop operation (operation order of the correct answer), the symbol combination corresponding to small part 3 is on the effective line When displayed (2) incorrect operation stop operation (the first stop operation is correct), the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination A is displayed on the effective line, (3) incorrect operation stop operation (If the first stop operation is incorrect) and if the stop operation is performed within the draw-in range of the symbol of small B, the symbol combination corresponding to the small B is displayed on the effective line, (4) If an incorrect answer stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is incorrect), and if the stop operation is performed outside the draw-in range of the symbol of small player B, the spilled mark is on the effective line It may be displayed.

  In addition, when “small part 3 + small part X” is set, (1) corresponds to small part 3 when the correct stop operation (the correct operation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is correct) is performed. The symbol combination to be displayed is displayed on the effective line, and (2) the stop operation of the incorrect answer is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop When the third stop operation is performed within the draw-in range of the small combination X symbols), the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination X is displayed on the effective line, and (3) the incorrect solution stop operation Is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation is correct), and the third stop outside the drawing range of the small winning combination X When an operation is performed, a spilled eye may be displayed on the effective line. In the third stop operation, there is a case in which the small winning combination X is aimed for the small winning combination X. Here, when the stop operation is correct, it means that the operation order is correct or / and the operation timing is suitable (an operation within the drawing range of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination).

  Moreover, in addition to the “small part 3 + small part X” described above, “small part 3 + small part Y” is set, and (1) when the correct stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small part 3 is When the stop operation of (2) incorrect answer is displayed on the effective line and the third stop operation is performed within the draw-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination Y is If it is displayed on the effective line, and (3) the operation to stop the incorrect answer is performed, and the third stop operation is performed outside the draw-in range of the symbol of the small part Y, a spill is displayed on the effective line You may In this case, in the third stop operation in the incorrect answer stop operation, since the role to be aimed is not known either small part X or small part Y, it is possible to prevent the shooting of the small combination winning in the third stop operation There is a case.

<Replay High Probability State (RT4)>
The replay high probability state (RT4) is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of the replay role is higher than that of the replay low probability state (RT1). In the re-game high probability state (RT4), a winning combination for internally winning is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44 (a).

  The winning combinations that are internally won in the high gaming probability state (RT4), special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, replay role 1, replay role 1 + replay role 3, small There are a part 1, a small part 2, a small part 3 a and a small part 3 b. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Here, “replay role 1 + replay role 3” indicates that the replay role 1 and the replay role 3 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay role 1 is displayed on the pay line (see FIG. a) In the remarks column, refer to the pressing order correct answer), otherwise, the symbol combination (falling replay) corresponding to the replay player 3 is displayed on the pay line (FIG. 44 (a) remarks column) , Push order incorrect reference time)). That is, “replay role 1 + replay role 3” is also a pushing role.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation sequence of the correct answer of “replay part 1 + replay part 3” will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), “Replay 1” and “Replay 3” are exactly “Replay 3”, “Replay 3C”, and “Replay 3R”. The operation sequence of different correct answers is assigned to correspond to each of the subdivided "re-playing role 1 + re-playing role 3". In addition, the range of the lottery data matched with each of "re-play combination 1 + re-play combination 3" subdivided into three is the same.

  For example, when “replay role 3L” of “replay role 1 + replay role 3” is internally elected, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110 is the correct operation, and other than that The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “replay role 3C” is internally elected among “replay role 1 + replay role 3”, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and other than that The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “replay role 3R” is internally elected among “replay role 1 + replay role 3”, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112 is the correct operation, and other than that The stop operation is an incorrect operation.

  In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination (replay role 1 + replay role 2, replay role 1 + replay role 3, small role 3 a) is internally won, uniqueness is made based on the subdivided internal win role. The correct operation order is determined, that is, the correct operation order is determined by one lottery process. However, when adopting a configuration that does not subdivide the winning combination, after internally winning the winning combination in the internal lottery processing of the winning combination, the lottery processing is performed to determine the correct operation order and the correct operation is performed. The order may be determined.

  In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (B) is satisfied in the replay high probability state (RT4), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is displayed on the effective line (replay In the case of winning a winning combination 3), it is shown to shift to the above-mentioned re-game low probability state (RT1). Further, in the figure, when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, transition to a special combination internal winning state (RT2) described later is shown. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special character 1 or the special character 2 is displayed on the effective line (when the special character 1 or the special character 2 wins) , It is shown that it shifts to the special game state (RT3) mentioned below.

<Special part internal winning state (RT2)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal selection flag corresponding to special combination 1 or special combination 2 is set to ON, and this flag is set to a stop operation by the player at a predetermined timing. It is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special combination can be displayed. In the special combination internal winning state, a winning combination to be internally selected is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the row of “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44 (a). The winning combinations that are internally elected in the special combination internal winning state include a re-play combination 1, a small combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 44A, when the condition (D) is satisfied in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed, It is shown that it shifts to the special game state (RT4) mentioned later.

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special game state (RT3) is a game state that is most advantageous to the player in all the game states. In the special game state, a winning combination winning the internal winning is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT3” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44 (a). In the special gaming state, only the small winning combination 3b is a winning combination for internal winning. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 44 (a) shows that, in the special gaming state (RT3), when the condition (E) is satisfied, that is, when the prescribed number of sheets is paid out, transition to the re-game low probability state (RT1) is made. It is done. Specifically, when the game is shifted to the special game state based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special part 1 being displayed, if the payout of medals exceeding 275 is performed, the re-game low probability state (RT1 Move to).

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state ends when payout of a prescribed number of sheets is executed, but for example, it ends when a predetermined winning combination (for example, single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, For example, the game may be ended when there is a winning of eight times, or when a game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times).

<Transition of AT-type game state>
Next, the gaming state of the AT system will be described using FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c). FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c) are transition diagrams of AT system gaming states of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. 43 (a). The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is performed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode.

  The high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation is more likely to be performed than the low navigation state, and there is an AT mode and a chance mode. Here, with the operation navigation, the operation sequence of the correct answer in the case where the internal winning combination (specifically, Replay 1 + Replay 2, Replay 1 + Replay 3 and Small 3a) is internally won. Say an effect to inform That is, the operation navigation means an effect of notifying the contents of the stop operation for medal acquisition, the contents of the stop operation for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state, and the maintenance of the advantageous gaming state.

  Here, the operation navigation will be described using FIG. 44 (b) and FIG. 45. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is performed using the number-of-payouts display 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 44 (b) shows display data indicating the correct operation order of the key order of the present embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a diagram in which the display data and the lighting mode of the payout amount display 127 are associated.

  For example, the display data 01 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data that suggests the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is , And data suggesting a stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, when the player is internally elected to the replayer role 2L of "replay role 1 + replay role 2", since the stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110 is correct, the first stop operation is left The display data 01 suggesting that it is selected is selected, and a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 01 is displayed on the number-of-payouts display 127 (see FIG. 45A), and the effect image display device 157 is selected. , An image (for example, the characters "1--") indicating that the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is displayed (not shown).

  Further, the display data 04 is data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The display data 05 is the first stop reel Data indicating the stop operation in which the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 is the first stop reel the middle reel 111, the second stop reel Data indicating the stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, and the display data 07 indicate that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. Data indicating the stop operation for setting the reel 110, the display data 08, the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, the third Data indicating the stop operation in which the stop reel is the middle reel 112, display data 09 is the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110 Is data that suggests

  Therefore, when the small winning combination 3CLR of "small winning combination 3a" is won internally in AT mode, the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, the second stop reel to the left reel 110, and the third stop reel to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is in progress, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the display data 06 While the lighting mode corresponding to is displayed (see FIG. 45B), the effect image display device 157 displays the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel. An image (for example, the character "213") indicating that the right reel 112 is displayed is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout amount display 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a re-playing combination or a small combination 3a. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3a may be set to three choices like the re-play combination, and the small winning combination 3a may also be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination can not be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, the stop operation of the correct answer of the replay role may be selected from six options as in the small winning combination 3a, and the replay role may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Also in this case, the internal winning combination can not be determined only by the lighting mode.

  In this embodiment, the low navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is higher than the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is performed may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is performed. The high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because a favorable result is provided to the player when the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation is performed. Here, the advantage is, specifically, the total number of game media paid out by the game stand with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. It means the ratio, the so-called payout rate (payout rate).

<State transition of AT system>
FIG. 43 (b) shows an effect state in each AT-type game state. Each gaming state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 43 (b), and this is called a rendering state. Specifically, the production state in the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state in the high navigation state is the normal state, confirmation notification state, judge state, pullback state, BB state, AT1 state, AT2 state, LMT (limit) state Have. The effect state of the high navigation state according to the modification of the first embodiment is only the BB state added to the effect state described with reference to FIG. 6C, so detailed description will be omitted.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing according to a modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the main control unit main processing according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the main control unit main processing according to the modification of the first embodiment, rendering state control processing A in step S106 of the main control main processing according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 10, rendering processing in step S107, The contents of the effect state control process B in step S113 are changed.

<Effect state control processing A>
Next, the effect state control process A in step S121 of FIG. 46 will be described using FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing a flow of effect state control processing A according to a modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to effect state control processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is.

  The effect state control process A according to the modification of the first embodiment is the same process as the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. , The description is omitted.

<Each game common processing>
Next, a description will be given, using FIG. 47 (b), of each-game common processing in step S401 of FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of each game common processing according to the modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to each game common processing according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (b) .

  In each game common processing according to the modification of the first embodiment, the content of step S501 of each game common processing according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 15B is changed to the content of step S521. Specifically, in step S521, it is determined whether the condition for executing the high navigation state related process is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state related process is that the gaming state is either during internal winning of a bonus or during operation of a bonus with a setting difference. In addition, the said conditions are not limited during activation of the bonus with a setting difference, and all the bonus may be in operation. If it is determined in step S521 that the condition for executing the high navigation state related process is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S502. If not, the process proceeds to step S503.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state process A of step S405 in FIG. 47A will be described using FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a flow of high navigation state processing A according to a modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to high navigation state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the high navigation state process A according to the modification of the first embodiment, the processes of steps S 821 and S 822 are added to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, it is determined in step S821 whether or not the rendering state is the BB state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S822, BB state processing A is executed. In the BB state processing A, processing relating to BB gaming is performed.

<Process for production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the effect processing in step S122 of FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of effect processing according to a modification of the first embodiment.

  In step S 2101, it is determined whether the value of the high navigation state counter is less than or equal to the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). If it does, the process proceeds to step S 2103. The process advances to step S2102. In this example, since the LMT state is 20 G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20 G-1 G), but may be another numerical value.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether the value of the difference sheet counter is less than or equal to the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example). If it does, the process proceeds to step S2103. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S2103. The process advances to step S2104. In this example, the LMP state is configured to be 20 G, the maximum number of payouts in three bet game is 11 sheets (maximum increase number is 8 sheets), and the high navigation state is ended when the difference sheet number exceeds 2000 sheets. In order to do this, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets−8 sheets × 20 G), but another numerical value may be used.

  In step S2103, the freeze information is set, and in the next step S2104, the other rendering processing is executed, and then the rendering processing ends.

  In the first embodiment, the freeze state is set when the rendering state is the LMT state in the high navigation state common processing A, but in the modification of the first embodiment, the rendering state is the LMT state Regardless of whether or not the condition is satisfied in step S2101 or step S2102, the freeze state is set.

<Effect state control processing B>
Next, the effect state control process B in step S123 of FIG. 46 will be described using FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a flow of effect state control processing B according to a modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to effect state control processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  Steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B according to the modification of the first embodiment are the same as the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. The description is omitted as well. In step S1721, after the other rendering state control processing B is performed, the rendering state control processing B ends. In the other rendering state control process B, for example, when transitioning from the high navigation state to the low navigation state in the BB state and satisfying the high navigation state termination condition, processing is performed to shift the rendering state from the BB state to the normal state. .

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B of step S1705 of FIG. 50 will be described using FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow of high navigation state processing B according to a modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the high navigation state process B according to the modification of the first embodiment, the processes of steps S1821 and S1822 are added to the high navigation state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, it is determined in step S1821 whether or not the rendering state is the BB state, and if so, processing proceeds to step S1822, and if not, processing proceeds to step S1804. In step S1822, the BB state process B is executed. In the BB state process B, a process of returning the rendering state to the state immediately before the BB state is performed after the BB state ends.

<Specific example of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 78, specific examples of various effects, various displays and the like executed by the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 to FIG. 78 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, and show the effect aspect of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  Here, the item "low / high navigation state" in each figure indicates the AT system gaming state (in this example, high navigation state or low navigation state), and the item "effect state" in each drawing is , In the present embodiment, the effect state in each gaming state (in this example, the normal state, the confirmed state, the judge state, the pullback state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the LMT (limit) state) is shown. Also, the item "high navigation state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state, and the item "representation state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in each effect state ing. Further, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the bet number (BET number) of game media in each game.

<Specific example of counter update display>
First, a specific example of the update display of the counter will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 to FIG. 54 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, and show the effect aspect of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3 bet game only>
FIG. 52 shows that only the betting game is performed in the case of transitioning to the normal state of the low navigation state after transitioning in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state in the effect state It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of the time counter.

  The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, in which a bet game is performed. In this game R28, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , Perform the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter Is being executed, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) is executed (in this example, a display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G") .

  The condition for starting the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not limited to the case where the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received, for example, until the third stop operation is received. After the display of “LAST 3G” is performed and the third stop operation is received, the display of “LAST 2G” may be started. Further, the effect mode of the AT2 effect is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a series of effects executed over a plurality of games, or an effect completed in one game. In addition, the display mode of the remaining number of games (count value of effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to this example, for example, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) It may be indicated by.

  The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a bet game is performed. In this game R27, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is performed as in the game R28, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, The display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G" is executed.

  The following game R26 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 26, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, in which a bet game is performed. In this game R26, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is performed similarly to the game R28 to the game R27, while the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) In the example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G" is executed.

  Further, in this game R26, it is the final game of the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). , While executing the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, and executing the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of obtained game media) in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. The conditions for starting the AT2 end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the presentation mode of the AT2 end screen and the display content of the result display are not particularly limited.

  The following game R25 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state shifted from the AT2 state is 9 and a bet game is performed. In this game R25, the effect state is judged from the state AT2 using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (such as immediately after the BET)). Since the transition to the state, the judgment effect corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, so the number of games (effect state counter (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 10G”) is performed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in this game R25 (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is a judge state using the effect image display device 157 From the above, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is executed, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of effect state counter) is 9, so an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”). In addition, since the flow of the effects of the game R24 to the game R20 is substantially the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judgment state is 19 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R19, the rendering state changes from the judge state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition has been made, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and at the same time, the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the rendering state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (rendering state counter Is displayed (in this example, the display of an image including the characters of "20/20"). The filling of the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not been performed yet at the same timing.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R19 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in L and the number of remaining games in LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) (in this example, display of an image including characters of "after 19/20") There is. In addition, since the flow of the effects of the game R18 to the game R1 is almost the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Execute display (In this example, display of an image including characters of “0/20” in the present example) including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) ing.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect) and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of obtained game media, the number of AT2 state games, etc.) Then, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image containing the characters of "after 0/20") and the display of the operation navigation ing. In addition, the conditions which start an ED production completion screen and a result display are not limited when a 3rd stop operation is received, The display content of the production | presentation aspect of an ED production completion screen or a result display is not specifically limited, either.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3 bet game and 2 bet game>
FIG. 53 shows a case in which three bet games and two bets are made in the case of transitioning to the normal state of the low navigation state after transitioning in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state. It is a figure showing an example of an update display of a counter when both playing is performed. In addition, about the same production | presentation and display as "the specific example / only 3 bet game of the update display of a counter" demonstrated using FIG. 52, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably (the following embodiment is also the same).

  The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, in which a bet game is performed. In this game R28, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , Perform the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter Is being executed, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) is executed (in this example, a display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G") .

  The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27 and is a game in which two bets are made in the AT2 state. In the game R27, since the two-piece betting game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R27, the rendering state is in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the start operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Thus, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Furthermore, since the two bet game is performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning combination is won, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed. In this example, although an example in which the AT2 effect is executed is shown even when the two bet game is performed in the AT2 state, a plurality of related AT2 effects are executed over a plurality of games. In the case of being composed of scenes, when a two bet game is performed in the AT2 state, the scene of the AT2 effect may not be updated in the game.

  The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 2, and a two-piece bet game is performed. In the game R1, since the two-piece betting game is performed in the LMT state, the number of remaining games in the LMT state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R1, the rendering state is the LMT 2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the start operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Thus, while the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is performed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state is not performed. Furthermore, since the double bet game is performed in the LMT state, even when the internal winning combination is won, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed. In this example, although an example in which the ED effect is performed is shown even when a two-piece bet game is performed in the LMT state, a plurality of related effects in which the ED effect is executed over a plurality of games are shown. In the case of being configured with a scene of, when a double bet game is performed in the LMT state, the scene of the ED effect in the game may not be updated.

  In this example, after the first display (in this example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed in the advantageous state (in this example, the AT2 state), the first game (in this example) When the execution of three bet game is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated and the second display in the first game (three bet game) (In this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is configured to be displayable.

  On the other hand, after the first display (display of the image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state), execution of the second game (two bet game in this example) starts When the second game (two bet game) is updated, the second display (the display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G") is updated when the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated. It is configured not to be displayed.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of counter update display / judgment effect is not performed>
FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judgment effect is not performed by the two bet game.

  The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27 and is a game in which two bets are made in the AT2 state. In the game R27, since the two-piece betting game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R27, the rendering state is in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the start operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Thus, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Furthermore, since the two bet game is performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning combination is won, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed.

  In this example, since the two-piece betting game is performed over the period of the game R27 to the game R18, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. However, since the betting game is performed in the subsequent game R17, the effect state is shifted to the LMT state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state. For this reason, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is not performed. Further, in this example, since the AT2 state is shifted to the LMT state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is not executed.

  The game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R17, the rendering state changes from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition has been made, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and at the same time, the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. .

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "20/20") Is displayed).

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , ED effect corresponding to the LMT state (ending effect) is executed.

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 2 Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "more 2/20" Is displayed).

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, that the third stop operation has been accepted), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (rendering state) using the effect image display device 157 Since the count value of the counter is 2 but this is the final game in the high navigation state, the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, game media (In this example, "2/20" in the present example), while displaying the number of obtained wins, the number of AT2 state games, etc.), and displaying the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter). The display of the image including the characters “) and the display of the operation navigation are erased.

  In this example, the game after the transition to the LMT state is performing a three bet game, but since the two bet game is being performed in the last AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (rendering state counter The number of remaining games in the high navigation state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested without being counted. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and a transition is made to the normal state in the low navigation state without being able to digest some games in the LMT state.

<Specific example of updated display of counter / when judgment effect and ED effect are not performed>
FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two bet game.

  The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27 and is a game in which two bets are made in the AT2 state. In the game R27, since the two-piece betting game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R27, the rendering state is in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the start operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Thus, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Furthermore, since the two bet game is performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning combination is won, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed.

  In this example, since two bet games are performed over the period from game R27 to game R0, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (counter value of presentation state counter) is not updated and remains at 2 The presentation state is transitioning from the high navigation state to the low navigation state without transitioning from the AT2 state to the judgment state or the LMT state. Therefore, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state and the ED effect corresponding to the LMT state are not performed. Further, in this example, since the state is shifted from the AT2 state to the low navigation state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state and the display of the judge end screen corresponding to the end of the judge state are not executed.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2 and a two-piece bet game is performed. In this game R0, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (rendering state counter) using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation) Is a final game with a count value of 2) but is in the high navigation state, the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed but the high navigation state is not performed. While executing the result display 2 in (for example, the display of the obtained number of game media, the number of AT2 state games, etc.), the AT2 effect is ended.

  In this example, since two bet games are being played over the period from game R27 to game R0, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the presentation state counter) is not digested, and the high navigation state is achieved. Only the number of remaining games (count value of the high navigation state counter) in is stored. As a result, the transition to the judgment state or the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is made without all the games (20 games in this example) in the LMT state can not be absorbed. There is.

<Specific example of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting indication effect>
Next, specific examples of the ED effect, the freeze effect, and the setting suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIG. 55 to FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific example of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting indication effect / 3 bet game only>
FIG. 55 shows the ED when only three bet games are played in the case of transitioning to the normal state of the low navigation state after the staging state is shifted in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state. It is a figure showing an example of production and freeze production.

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judgment state is 19 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R19, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157 Since the transition from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. Is displayed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining numbers in the LMT state A display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) (in the present example, the characters of "20/20" are included) Running the display) of the image.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R19 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in L and the number of remaining games in LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) (in this example, display of an image including characters of "after 19/20") There is. In addition, since the flow of the presentation of the following game R18-game R2 is also substantially the same, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, in which a bet game is performed. In this game R1, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , And the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1, so Execute display (In this example, display of the image including the character of “after 1/20”) including the image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) ing. Further, in this game R1, using the effect image display device 157, it is possible to infer a setting suggestion effect (setting value can be suggested to indicate a setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) shown by a symbol A or "suggest A" in the figure. I am performing. Although the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap with part of the ED effect.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Execute display (In this example, display of an image including characters of “0/20” in the present example) including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) ing.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the obtained number of gaming media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed while The display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters of "after 0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. . The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in the present example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in part of the background display. Also, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and the suggestion A and the suggestion B may be simultaneously performed in the final game in the LMT state.

<Specific example of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting indication effect / 3 bet game and 2 bet game>
FIG. 56 (a) shows that in the case of transition to the normal state of the low navigation state after the effect state is shifted in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, three bets and two bets It is a figure showing an example of ED production and freeze production when playing a game.

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is nineteen, and is a game in which two bets are made in the judgment state. In the game R19, since the two bet game is performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

  For this reason, in the game R19, the rendering state is a judge state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20 G) is satisfied. That's why we have not performed ED production and freeze production.

  In this example, although an example in which the judgment effect is performed is shown even when the two bet game is performed in the judgment state, a plurality of judgment effects may be executed over a plurality of games. In the case of being constituted by the scene of, when the double bet game is performed in the judge state, the scene of the judge effect in the game may not be updated.

  The following game R18 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19 and a bet game is performed. In this game R18, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157 Since the transition from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. Is running).

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "20/20") Is displayed).

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R18 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, high navigation Although the number of games in the state (count value of high navigation state counter) is 18, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the presentation state counter) In the example, the display of an image including the characters “after 19/20” is executed. In addition, since the flow of the presentation of the following game R17-game R1 is also substantially the same, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , ED effect corresponding to the LMT state (ending effect) is executed.

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 1 Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "after 1/20" Is displayed). In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, a setting suggestion effect (a effect that can estimate the setting value) indicating a setting value is executed, which is indicated by a symbol A or "Suggest A" in the figure. . Although the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap with part of the ED effect.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the obtained number of gaming media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed while The display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the character of “after 1/20”) and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. . The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in the present example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in part of the background display. Further, the display timing of the ED effect end screen is not limited to this example, and the display may be started in response to the establishment of other conditions such as acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135.

  In this example, execution of a specific effect (in this example, ED effect) can be started in an advantageous state (in this example, LMT state), and certain requirements are satisfied at the start of game execution. In this case (in this example, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 20 G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a bet game in this example), a specific count value (this In the example, the high navigation state counter is updated so that execution of a specific effect (ED effect) can be started in the first game (three bet game).

  On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes 20 G), the second game (two bet game in this example) In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the specific effect (ED effect) is not started in the second game (three bet game). For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In this example, the execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in an advantageous state (in this example, the LMT state), and a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game (in the present example, high). In the case where the number of remaining games in the navigation state is 20 G), if the game is the first game (three bets in this example), a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) Is updated so that execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in the first game (three bet game).

  On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes 20 G), the second game (two bet game in this example) In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that execution of a certain freeze effect is not started in the second game (three bet game). For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, in the present example, the betting game is performed in the three-piece betting game after the transition to the LMT state, but since the two-piece betting game is performed in the immediately preceding judgment state, the number of remaining games in the judgment state Only the remaining game number in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested without the state counter count value being consumed. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and a transition is made to the normal state in the low navigation state without being able to digest some games in the LMT state.

  FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). In this example, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and in the game R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, and the conditions for transition from the judge state to the LMT state. (The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20 G), but since it is a two bet game, ED effect and freeze effect are not executed.

  In addition, since two bet games are performed in two games of the game R19 and the game R18 in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not digested, and the high navigation is performed. Only the remaining number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested, and the number of games in the LMT state is eighteen. For this reason, the ED effect of the final game in the high navigation state (in the case of transition to the LMT state, the LMT state) is not performed without executing the setting indication effect (indication A) executed in response to the 19th game in the LMT state. Only the setting indication effect (indication B) which is executed triggered by the display of the end screen is executed.

<Example of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / only 2 bet game>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect when the two bet game is continued in the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R25 to the game R19 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 to 19, and is a game in which a two-piece bet game is performed in the judge state. During the game R25 to the game R19, since the two bet game is performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 9.

  Therefore, in the game R25 to the game R19, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect status is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since the state is the state, while the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20 G) is satisfied. That's why we have not performed ED production and freeze production.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 9 and a two-piece bet game is performed. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged as the judge state using the effect image display device 157. , Judge production corresponding to the judge state is executed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state, and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the obtained number of game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) The display including the image showing the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect status counter) in (the display of the image including the characters “LAST 9G” in this example) and the display of the judge effect are erased. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, since the two bet games are continued in the judge state, the remaining game number in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not absorbed from the remaining 9 games, and the remaining in the high navigation state Only the number of games (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is made without all the games in the LMT state can not be absorbed.

  In addition, since the transition to the LMT state is not performed, the setting suggestion effect (indication A) to be executed triggered by the 19th game in the LMT state is not executed, and the high navigation state (the transition to the LMT state is Only the setting indication effect (indication B) which is executed triggered by the display of the ED effect end screen of the final game in the LMT state) is executed.

<Specific example of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting indication effect / modification of freeze effect>
FIG. 58 (a) and FIG. 58 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation of the freeze effect. In this example, another freeze effect different from the freeze effect executed simultaneously with the ED effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second freeze effect”) is configured to be executable.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the second freeze effect in the case of playing a 3-bet game. The game R 327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT 2 state is 31 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R327, an effect for managing the number of games up to the game for starting the second freeze effect triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the satisfaction of the start condition of interlocking effect). Start counting the start counter.

  The game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. In this game R327, a certain condition is established (in this example, the bet game is started and the effect start counter which starts counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value) as a trigger. The interlocking effect executed over the game R327 to the game R326 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect.

  In the present example, since 200 G AT addition is performed in the game R 325, after the end of the second freeze effect, display of an image including the number of AT addition games (in this example, “+200 G !!” After the display of the image including the characters of (1), a rendering condition is displayed using the rendering image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). Since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed since the AT2 state, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 229, the game number (counting of the effect state counter) A display including an image indicating a value) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 229G”) is performed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the second freeze effect in the case where two bet game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. The game R <b> 325 in this example is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and two bet games are performed. In the game R325, since the two-piece betting game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 30.

  Therefore, in the game R325, the rendering state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Thus, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated.

  The following game R324 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 324 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R324, a certain condition is established (in this example, the bet game is started and the effect start counter which starts counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value) as a trigger. While ending (or interrupting) the interlocking effect executed over the game R327 to the game R325, the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect. Note that the flow of the effects after the second freeze effect is the same as the flow of the effects of the game R 325 in FIG. 58 (a).

<Specific example of ED effect in non-AT state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60, a specific example of the ED effect in the non-AT state will be described. 59 to 60 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect in the case of performing a 3-piece bet game. The game R550 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 550, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the normal state is 19 and the three bet game is performed. In this game R550, the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , Perform the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter Is displayed, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect status counter) is executed (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 19G") .

  The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the AT1 state is 24 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R50, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the start operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). , Perform the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter Since the count value of is 24, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 24G") is executed. .

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R19, the rendering state changes from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition has been made, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and at the same time, the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the rendering state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (rendering state counter Is displayed (in this example, the display of an image including the characters of "20/20").

  The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a bet game is performed. In this game R1, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , And the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1, so Execute display (In this example, display of the image including the character of “after 1/20”) including the image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) ing. In addition, in this game R1, using the effect image display device 157, a setting suggestion effect (a effect that can estimate the setting value) indicative of the setting value is executed, which is indicated by a symbol A or "Suggest A" in the figure. .

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Execute display (In this example, display of an image including characters of “0/20” in the present example) including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) ing.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the obtained number of gaming media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed while The display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters of "after 0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. .

  FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect in the case where the game is shifted to the LMT state after the double bet game is performed in the normal state. The game R900 to the game R18 are normal games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 900 to 18, and is a game in which two bets are played. In games R19 to R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 to 18, and the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in high navigation state is less than 20 G) is satisfied. Since it is a game, it has not performed ED production and freeze production.

  The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the normal state is 19 and a bet game is performed. In this game R17, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition from the normal state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and at the same time, the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) Is running).

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "20/20") Is displayed).

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R17 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, high navigation Although the number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the presentation state counter) In the example, the display of an image including the characters “after 19/20” is executed. In addition, since the flow of the presentation of the following game R16-game R1 is also substantially the same, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , ED effect corresponding to the LMT state (ending effect) is executed.

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 2 Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "more 2/20" Is displayed).

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (the end effect regarding the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired or A display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) while executing the number of games in the AT2 state, etc. (in the present example, an image including characters of “2/20”) And the display of the operation navigation are erased. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, in the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state), transition to the first advantageous gaming state (in this example, the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is possible, and the first advantageous game It is configured to be able to execute an end effect (in this example, display of an ED effect end screen) relating to the end of the state (AT2 state (= high navigation state)), and the first game in the advantageous state (high navigation state) In this example, when only the three bet game is performed, there is a case where the transition to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) may be made and the ending effect may be executed, and the advantageous state When only the second game (in this example, two bet game is played) is performed in (high navigation state), the ending effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state) Are configured to

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being performed. Further, by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets of game media in the subsequent games.

  In this example, the transition to the LMT state is made without transitioning from the normal state to a state other than the LMT state (such as the AT1 state or the AT2 state). I am performing the production.

  FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect when the two bet game is continued in the normal state.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and is a game in which two bets are played. In this game R0, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the normal state using the effect image display device 157. , Normal effect corresponding to the normal state is executed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R0 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), it is the final game in the high navigation state using the effect image display device 157. , While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state, while executing the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, etc.) in the high navigation state, the display of the normal effect It is erased. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, in the high navigation state, transition is made to the low navigation state without transitioning to a state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but ED effects and setting suggestion effects are executed.

<Specific example of ED effect during BB internal winning>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a specific example of the ED effect during BB internal winning will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows an effect aspect of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect to be performed after the BB game. In addition, in order to avoid the overlapping description, only effects different from the effects described using FIG. 59 will be described.

  The game R 580 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 580, and the BB is internally won in the normal state. In this game R580, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met (in this example, the bet operation has been accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used, and since the effect state is the normal state, the normal state is entered. A corresponding normal effect is executed, and a BB fixed effect (in this example, display of an image including the characters "Bonus fixed!") Is performed which suggests internal winning of BB.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R 580 (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest a stop operation related to BB winning. The operation navigation (in this example, navigation suggesting aiming at the symbol combination "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" corresponding to BB (bonus combination)) is executed.

  The following game R579 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 579, and the BB is won in the normal state. In this game R579, effect image display is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is established (in the present example, the symbol combination "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed on the pay line). Using the device 157, the BB effect of notifying the start of the BB game is started.

  FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect performed during the internal winning of BB. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, only effects different from the effects described using FIG. 61 (b) will be described.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the internal winning of BB is made. In this game R0, it is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the acceptance of the third stop operation), so LMT The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the state (the end effect concerning the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the obtained number of game media, etc.) Is running.

  In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, an operation navi (in this example, a BB (bonus combination) in this example) corresponding to a stop operation relating to a BB winning is indicated. Continues to display “Navi suggesting to aim at”, and executes setting suggestion effects (effects that can infer the setting value) indicating setting values, which are indicated by a symbol B or “Suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, in an advantageous state (in this example, high navigation state), it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (a gaming state) (in this example, an AT2 state). The effect (end effect) (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen) regarding the end is configured to be executable, and transition to a certain gaming state (AT2 state) in the advantageous state (high navigation state) and the end effect The game is configured to be able to start execution of (display of the ED effect end screen), and it is an advantageous state (high navigation state), when playing a game in a state in which the special combination is internally won, the advantageous state ( In the high navigation state, execution of the end effect (display of the ED effect end screen) can be started without shifting to a certain gaming state (AT2 state).

  For this reason, even if the advantageous state is ended without being able to align the pattern relating to the special part, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointing feeling or the impatient feeling by making the user feel in transition to an advantageous certain gaming state. It becomes possible. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of interlocking production>
Next, a specific example of the interlocking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of interlocking effect in time series.

<Specific example of interlocking effect / when interlocking effect normally proceeds>
FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of effect when the interlocked effect normally proceeds.
Here, the interlocking effect is composed of a plurality of scenes having relevance (story property), and means an effect executed over a plurality of games. Although the effect mode of the interlocking effect is not particularly limited, the interlocking effect (ordinary pattern) of this example is a scene of "Enemy selection" shown by the code N, "Enemy determination shown by the code N + 1 as shown in FIG. The scene of "opposition", the scene of "enemy attack" shown by code N + 2, the scene of "friend attack" shown by code N + 3 → the scene of "win (or defeat)" shown by code N + 4.

  Referring back to FIG. 62, a game R90 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 90 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 9 and a three-card bet game is performed. In this game R90, a scene of "enemy selection" is executed as one scene of interlocking effect. Although illustration is omitted, during the subsequent game R89 to game R85, since a three bet game is performed, one scene of interlocking effect is executed in each game, and interlocking effect normally proceeds.

  The following games R86 to R83 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 83 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 5 to 2, and a bet game is performed. During this game R86 to game R83, as a continuation of the interlocking production, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" → the scene of "friend attack" → the scene of "win" is executed in this order The interlocking production is performed until the last scene.

<Specific example of interlocking effect / when interlocking effect does not normally proceed>
FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of effects when the interlocked effect does not normally proceed.
The game R86 to the game R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 5 to 4, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. During the game R86 to the game R85, a scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → a scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order as a linked effect, and the linked effect normally proceeds.

  The following game R84 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84, and two bets are made in the judgment state. In the game R84, since the two bet game is performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

  For this reason, in the game R84, the rendering state is a judge state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the characters “LAST 4G” are included. Display has not been updated. Furthermore, since the two bet game is performed during the interlocking effect of the judge state, the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is executed again without advancing the scene of the interlocking effect. Therefore, in the present example, the same "enemy attack" scene is executed redundantly in both the game R85 and the game R84, and the interlocking rendering does not normally proceed. However, in the subsequent game R83 to game R82, since a three-piece bet game was performed, the scene of "friend attack" → the scene of "winning" as a continuation of interlocking production in the period of this game R83 to game R82. Is performed in this order, and interlocking production is performed until the last scene.

  In this example, a certain effect (first effect) (in this example, a Judge effect) can be executed over a plurality of games, and the first effect (judge effect) is the first scene. (In this example, the scene of "Enemy Attack") and the second scene (in this example, the scene of "Ally Attack"), including the production of the first scene (Scene of "Enemy Attack") If the execution of the first game (three bet game in this example) is started after the game in which the second game is performed, the second scene ("Ally in the first game (three bet game) is started. Execution of the production of the "scene of the attack" is configured to be startable, and after the game in which the production of the first scene (the scene of the "enemy attack") is performed, the second game (in this example, two sheets) When execution of a betting game is started, a second scene (“friend attack” in the second game (two betting game) Execution of the effect of the scene) is configured so as not to start.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player.

FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of effects when the ED effect is started without the interlocked effect normally proceeding.
The game R86 to the game R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 5 to 4, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. During the game R86 to the game R85, a scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → a scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order as a linked effect, and the linked effect normally proceeds.

  The following games R84 to R18 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 18, and two bet games are performed in the judge state. During the game R84 to the game R18, since the two bet game is performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 4.

  For this reason, in the game R84 to the game R18, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the state, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “LAST 4G” Display that includes characters not updated. Furthermore, since the two bet game was performed during the linked state of the judge state, the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed without advancing the scene of the connected field. . Therefore, in the present example, the same "enemy attack" scene is repeatedly executed in the period of the game R85 to the game R18, and the interlocking rendering does not normally proceed.

  The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judgment state is 19 and a bet game is performed. In this game R17, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. Is running).

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the presentation state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the number of all games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, an image including characters of "20/20") Is displayed).

  In this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is executed redundantly in the game R85 to the game R18 period, and the interlocking rendering does not normally proceed, so the game transitions to the LMT state in the game R17 and the ED rendering is performed. It has been started, and the interlocking production can not be executed until the last scene (in this example, the scene of “winning” or the scene of “defeating” of the interlocking functioning functioning as a notice of the subsequent game).

  FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example of interlocking effect in the case where the two bet game is continued in the judge state.

  The game R86 to the game R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 5 to 4, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. During the game R86 to the game R85, a scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → a scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order as a linked effect, and the linked effect normally proceeds.

  The following games R84 to R1 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 1, and two bet games are performed in the judge state. In the game R84 to the game R1, since the two bet game is performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 4.

  For this reason, in the game R84 to the game R1, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect status is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the state, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “LAST 4G” Display that includes characters not updated.

  Furthermore, since the two bet game was performed during the linked state of the judge state, the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed without advancing the scene of the connected field. . Therefore, in this example, during the game R85 to the game R1, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the same "enemy attack" scene is executed in duplicate, and the interlocking rendering does not normally proceed. For this reason, the player can easily notice that the two bet game has been played by observing the progress of the interlocking effect.

  The following game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is 4 and a two-piece bet game is performed. In this game R0, it is the final game in the high navigation state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). From this, while executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state, while executing the result display 2 (for example, the display of the obtained number of game media etc.) in the high navigation state, Has been erased. In addition, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, setting suggestion effects (effects capable of deducing setting values) indicating setting values are executed as indicated by reference characters B and “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, since the same "enemy attack" scene is repeatedly executed in the game R85 to the game R1 period and the interlocking rendering does not normally proceed, the high navigation state ends in the game R0 and the ED rendering is performed. Can not be executed until the final scene (in this example, the scene of "winning" or the scene of "defeating" of the interlocking effect that functions as a preview of the subsequent game). For this reason, the player can easily notice that the two bet game has been played by observing the progress of the interlocking effect.

  FIG. 64 (B) to FIG. 64 (D) are diagrams showing modified examples of interlocking effects. The interlocking effect according to the present invention is not limited to the interlocking effect described with reference to FIG. 64 (A). For example, as shown by a symbol N in FIG. 64 (B), the scene of “enemy selection” and “enemy determination” The "face-to-face" scene may be composed of one scene.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), a scene of "enemy attack and friend attack" is newly added, and a scene of "enemy attack and friend attack" is shown as symbol N + 1 in FIG. 64 (C). And the scene of "enemy attack" is composed of one scene, and the scene of "enemy attack and friend attack" and the scene of "friend attack" are composed of one scene, as shown by symbol N + 2 in FIG. May be

  In addition, as shown by symbol N + 1 in FIG. 64 (D), after executing the scene of “enemy attack and friend attack” composed of one scene, as shown by symbol N + 2 in FIG. You may perform the scene of the several "enemy attack" comprised by these.

  In addition, according to the type of interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64 (A) to FIG. 64 (D), the content of the privilege to be given to the player may be changed or the degree of expectation may be varied. In addition, even in the case of playing a two-piece bet game, in a certain aspect of the interlocking effect, all scenes may always be executed, or in the case of performing a two-piece bet game, all It may be configured such that the last scene (or the last scene suggesting the judgment result (for example, the scene of “winning” or “defeating”) is not reproduced.

<Specific example of specific display>
Next, a specific example of the specific display will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 66 are each a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the specific display in time series.

<Specific example of specific indication / three bet game at the time of judge transition>
FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a bet game with three bets is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R82 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 82 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1 and is a game in which a bet game is performed. In this game R82, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , And an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state (for example, an effect in which a character of a character is running as indicated by a symbol d1 in FIG. 67A) is executed and an operation navigation (in this example, “2 1) is displayed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of effect state counter) is 1, so an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) is included. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is executed.

  In this game R82, using the effect image display device 157, displaying the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (in the example shown by symbol d1 in FIG. 67A, the characters "GET 1320" are included) In addition to performing display), it is suggested that the third stop operation has been accepted using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the third stop operation has been accepted). An effect to be performed (for example, an effect to darken the entire screen indicated by a symbol d1 'in FIG. 67A) is executed.

  The following game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and is a game in which three bet games are performed. In this game R81, the AT2 effect is performed and the operation navigation is performed as in the game R82, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, The display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G" is executed.

  Further, in this game R81, it is the final game of the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). , And the display of an AT2 end effect screen (for example, a background image including a character of “end” shown by a symbol d2 in FIG. 67A) corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state ( For example, while executing the display of the number of gaming media acquired in the high navigation state shown by symbol d2 in FIG. 67 (A)), the image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of effect state counter) The display including the display (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In this example, the display of the AT2 end effect screen is performed in the final game in the AT2 state, but may be performed at another timing (for example, after transition to the judge state).

  The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state shifted from the AT2 state is 9 and a bet game is performed. In this game R80, the effect state is judged from the state AT2 using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (such as immediately after the BET)). Since the transition to the state, the judgment effect corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, so the number of games (effect state counter Is displayed (in this example, the display of an image including the character of "fall within 10 G").

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R80 (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is a judge state using the effect image display device 157 From the above, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is executed, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of effect state counter) is 9, so an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”).

  Here, an example of the judgment effect executed in the game R80 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, when the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received, the judgment effect start screen shown by the code d3 is displayed, and when the first stop operation is received in the game, the judgment effect shown by the code d4 (interactive effect Judge effect indicated by a symbol d4 'when a scene of "enemy selection" which is one scene of the scene and effect indicating that the enemy is not selected is executed and the third stop operation is received in the game (When it is a scene of "enemy selection" which is one scene of interlocking effect, showing that the enemy is selected) and a certain time has passed after the third stop operation is received in the game In addition, a judgment effect (a scene of “enemy selection” which is one scene of the interlocking effect, and an effect indicating that the enemy is determined) which is indicated by a symbol d4 ′ is executed.

<Specific example of specific display / double bet game at the time of judge transition>
FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a two-piece bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. The flow of the effects of the game R82 to the game R81 and the game R79 is substantially the same as the effect described using FIG. 65 (a), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and two bet games are played. In this game R80, since a double bet game was performed in the judge state, a display including an image showing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) The specific display (in the present example, a black-out in this example) is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) without being performed. Display that includes only the background image).

  Here, the “specific display (specific display)” refers to a display that is not related to the advantageous state, for example, a display that is displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state) (for example, A display different from any of the display (for example, the judgment effect) corresponding to the display of the AT2 end screen) and the second advantageous game state (for example, the judgment state) is applicable. The display mode of the specific display is not particularly limited. For example, the display mode is a display of an image including a certain character (in this example, the character “in preparation for presentation”) indicated by a symbol d5 in FIG. It may be a display made of a certain pattern or figure.

  In the present example, a bet game is performed after the two bet game is performed in the judge state, but if the two bet game is continued, certain conditions also exist in the two bet game. The specific display is displayed using the effect image display device 157 in response to the fact that the condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Further, in this case, the display of the AT2 end screen may be executed until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received). With such a configuration, even when the specific display is displayed, the player can grasp the end of the AT2 state, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

<Specific Example of Specific Display / Modification of Three Bet Game at Judgment Transition>
FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of the effect when the three bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and is a game in which a bet game is performed. In this game R81, as in the case of the game R82, an AT2 effect (for example, an effect indicated by a symbol d1 in FIG. 67A, an effect in which a character of your character is running) is performed and an operation navigation is performed while in the AT2 state A display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) (display of an image including characters of “LAST 0G” in this example) is executed.

  Further, in this game R81, using the effect image display device 157, displaying the number of gaming media acquired in the high navigation state (in the example shown by the symbol d1 in FIG. 67A, the characters "GET 1320" are included) Since the final game of the AT2 state is performed using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is established (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), While executing the display of the AT2 end effect screen (for example, a background image including the character of “end” shown by a symbol d2 in FIG. 67A) corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed Not running

  The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state shifted from the AT2 state is 9 and a bet game is performed. In this game R80, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the number of gaming media acquired in the high navigation state, the display including the characters "GET 1328", as indicated by the code d2 in FIG. 67A) is executed. doing.

<Specific Example of Specific Display / Modified Example of Two-Bet Betting Game at Judgment Transition>
FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of the effect when the two bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. The flow of the effect of the game R81 is substantially the same as the effect described with reference to FIG. 66 (a), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and two bet games are played. In this game R80, since a double bet game was performed in the judge state, a display including an image showing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) The specific display (in the present example, a black-out in this example) is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) without being performed. Display that includes only the background image).

  Further, in this game R81, when a certain condition is met (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, in FIG. The display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, "display including the characters of" GET 1326 sheets (1328 sheets-2 sheets because it was won by 2 sheets) "is executed.

  In this example, in the advantageous state (in this example, high navigation state), it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (in this example, AT2 state) and the second advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judge state) The first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is more advantageous for the player than the second advantageous gaming state (judge state), and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is configured. After completion, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (judge state), and the display means (in this example, the effect image display device 157) is the first display (in this example, the AT2 end screen) A second display (in this example, a judge effect) and a third display (in this example, a specific display (a display including only a black background image)) The display shows the end of the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) The second display is a display corresponding to the second advantageous game state (judge state), and the third display is a specific display not related to the advantageous state (high navigation state) And when the execution of the first game (three bets in this example) is started after the first display is displayed, a specific count value (in this example, high navigation state) The counter is updated, and the second display is configured to be able to be displayed in the first game, and after the first display is displayed, execution of the second game (in this example, a two-piece bet game) Is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated, and the third display can be displayed in the game.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. Since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

  FIGS. 67A to 67D are diagrams showing specific examples of the flow of effects including the specific display. In the above embodiment, the effects of FIG. (A) and FIG. (B) are mainly applied, but the interlocking effect according to the present invention is not limited to these effects, and, for example, FIG. Instead of displaying the number of gaming media acquired in the high navigation state as shown by symbol d6 in FIG. 6D, the number of gaming media acquired in a certain rendering state (in this example, the AT2 state) is displayed It is also good.

<Specific example of updating ceiling counter and promotion counter>
Next, specific examples of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 to FIG. 74 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, and show the effect aspect of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  Here, the item "ceiling counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling. Further, “promotion counter”, “type AT1”, “judge mode”, and “confirmation notification flag” in each drawing respectively indicate variables, flags, and the like (internal information of slot machine) in the above-described various flowcharts. Further, the item "condition device" in each figure is the number of the condition device in FIG. (Number) is shown.

<Specific example of renewal of ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching ceiling by bet game>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when three games are played in the high navigation state and the ceiling is reached, and the effect state transitions in the order of normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state.

  The game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 4 and is a game in which a bet is made. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and there is a prophecy effect that suggests transition to the AT1 state as a normal effect. Have started. Further, in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19, since the ceiling counter after subtraction becomes a certain value (0 in this example), the AT1 type lottery is performed and the AT1 winning flag is turned on. It is setting and preparing to shift the effect state to the AT1 state. Although not shown, during the subsequent game R299 to game R297, the indication effect is continued as a normal effect.

  The following game R 296 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 296 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a bet game is performed. In this game R296, since the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state (because the normal state has ended), preparation is made to shift the effect state from the normal state to the finalization state, and as a normal effect , To perform the aura effect suggesting to shift to the AT1 state.

  The following game R295 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 295, and the confirmation notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and is a game in which a three bet game is performed. In this game R295, a bonus confirmation display (in the present example, a display including the characters "Bonus confirmed!") Is executed as a normal effect to notify of transition to the AT1 state (in this example, the pseudo bonus). Further, in this game R295, since the AT1 type is low in the decision notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and determination of whether to promote the AT1 type, etc. After execution, in the confirmation notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, a process of setting the confirmation notification flag from off to on is performed.

  The following game R 294 is a second game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 294 and the final announcement state is the third game, and is a game in which a bet is made. In the game R294, a bonus finalized display (in this example, a display including the characters "bonus finalized!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R294, since the AT1 type is low in the decision notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and determination of whether to promote the AT1 type, etc. After having done, the display (promotion drawing display) regarding the promotion drawing of AT1 type is performed.

  Further, in the game R 294, in the decision notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, since the decision notification flag is on, the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example) It is determined whether it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is no. Since it was 5, it is maintaining the production state in the finalized state.

  The following game R293 is a third game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 293 and the final announcement state is the third game, and is a game in which a 3-piece bet game is performed. In this game R293, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "Bonus confirmation!" Is continued) as a normal effect. Further, in this game R293, since the AT1 type is low in the decision notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and determination of whether to promote the AT1 type, etc. Is going.

  Furthermore, in this game R293, in the decision notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, since the decision notification flag is on, the internal winning result (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3) It is determined whether it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is no. Since it was 3, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation prompting the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation status is prepared for transitioning from the confirmation notification status to the AT 1 status. Is going.

  The following game R292 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 292 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalization state is 20, and a bet game is performed. In this game R292, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the BET operation has been performed), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157, so the AT1 state To perform the AT1 effect corresponding to, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction Since the count value of is 20, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the character of “20 G”) is executed.

<Specific example of renewal of ceiling counter and promotion counter / in case of not reaching ceiling by bet game>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the double bet game is performed in the high navigation state and the ceiling is not reached and the effect state is maintained in the normal state.

  In this example, since the bet game is continued in the game after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the ceiling counter is not subtracted. For this reason, in the normal state process A described using FIG. 19, the overhead counter after the subtraction is not determined to be a certain value (0 in this example), and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. I have nothing to do. Further, since the effect state counter in the normal state is not updated in the two bet game, it is not determined that the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 28. , The production state will not be the final notice state.

  That is, in this example, a second counter (in this example, a ceiling counter) other than the first counter (in this example, a high navigation state counter) for the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state) And is configured to be able to update a certain count value of the second counter (ceiling counter) each time a game is played in the advantageous state (high navigation state), and the certain count value is the second certain one. When it becomes a value (in this example, 0), it is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state (in this example, AT1 state) that is advantageous for the player, and in the advantageous state (high navigation state) When one game (three bet games in this example) is performed, both of a specific count value (high navigation state counter value) and a certain count value (ceiling counter value) are counted. The values are configured to be updatable and When a second game (two bet game in this example) is performed in the navigation state), a specific count value (the value of the high navigation state counter) and a certain count value (the value of the ceiling counter) Only the specific count value (value of the high navigation state counter) is configured to be updatable.

  For this reason, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected to correct the player who did not play the game correctly.

<Specific example of renewal of ceiling counter and promotion counter: In the case of reaching the ceiling by 3 bet game and 2 bet game>
FIG. 70 shows an example of the flow of effects when the three-player game and the two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state and the ceiling is reached, and the effect state is shifted in the order of normal state → confirmed notice state → AT1 state FIG.

  In this example, since two bet games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter has reached 699, the period for the two bet game (in this example, the game from the game following the game R 999) The ceiling counter is not decremented in the 100 game period up to R 899). For this reason, in the subsequent games R898 and subsequent games, the betting game is performed by three and the ceiling counter is subtracted, but the effect example described using FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 The number of games required to reach the ceiling is 100 games later than in the case of arrival), and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 200 and reaches the ceiling. In addition, since the flow of the presentation at the time of shifting to a normal state-> fixed notification state-> AT1 state is the same as that of the other embodiment, the description is omitted.

<Updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When transitioning to LMT without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects in the case where a three-card game and a two-piece bet game are performed in the high navigation state and the state is shifted to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since two bet games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter has reached 699, the period for the two bet game (in this example, the game from the game following the game R 999) The ceiling counter is not decremented in the period up to the game before R20. For this reason, in the subsequent games after the game R19, a three-piece betting game is performed, but in comparison to the example of the effect described using FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), The number of games to reach the ceiling is delayed, and the state is shifted to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling (without the ceiling counter becoming zero). In addition, since the flow of the production | presentation in the case of transfering from a normal state to a LMT state is the same as that of another Example, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When transitioning to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects in the case where three-player game and two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the state is shifted to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since two bet games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter has reached 699, the period for the two bet game (in this example, the game from the game following the game R 999) The ceiling counter is not subtracted in the period up to R0). For this reason, the number of games to reach the ceiling is delayed compared to the example of presentation described with FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and reaches the ceiling), and does not reach the ceiling The high navigation state ends in the normal state (the ceiling counter does not become 0), and the navigation state shifts to the low navigation state.

  The flow of effects when transitioning from the normal state in the high navigation state to the normal state in the low navigation state is the same as in the other embodiments, so the description thereof is omitted, but using FIG. 60 (b) As described above, in this example, in the high navigation state, transition is made to the low navigation state without transitioning to a state other than the normal state (such as the AT1 state or the AT2 state). ing.

<Example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the promotion counter is not updated>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects in the case where a 3-card game and a 2-bet bet game are performed in the finalized state of the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated.

  In this example, since the two bet game is performed in a plurality of games in the finalization state in which the effect state is shifted from the normal state, the period for the two bet game (in this example, the next to the game R294) In the period from the game to the game R270, the promotion counter is not decremented. For this reason, the number of games from transition from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is delayed compared to the example of presentation described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and reaches the ceiling). After the display (promotion lottery display) relating to the type elevation lottery is performed over a plurality of game periods (in this example, a period from the game R 294 to the game R 270), the state is shifted to the AT 1 state. In addition, since the flow of the presentation at the time of shifting to a AT1 state from a decision notification state is the same as that of another Example, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Specific example of updating ceiling counter and promotion counter / when not performing operation navigation>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when operation navigation is not performed in the determination notification state of the high navigation state.

  In this example, the condition device is No. 1 in the first game in the determination notification state with respect to the effect example (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 reaching the ceiling) described using FIG. The only difference is that it is three. In the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, when the finalized notification flag is on, the condition device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 4 in this example) according to the AT1 type. It is judged whether or not. However, in the game R295, since the determination notification flag is off, the determination itself is not performed. Therefore, the operation navigation performed when the condition device is the internal winning result according to the AT1 type (in this example, seven Alternatively, the navigation system does not execute the navigation to urge the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 2 and does not prepare to shift the staging state from the finalization state to the AT1 state.

<Specific example of updating of ceiling counter and promotion counter / When AT1 type is promoted>
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the AT1 type is promoted in the determination notification state of the high navigation state.

  The game R270 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 270, and the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example) in the finalization state, and is a game in which three bets have been made is there. In this game R270, since the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example), the AT1 type is changed from low to high (AT1 type is promoted), and the judge mode is changed from normal to high accuracy doing.

  Further, in this game R270, a display related to an AT1 type promotion lottery is performed using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). After performing (promotion lottery display), the promotion of the AT1 type using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). Display (promotional display) is suggested to have been confirmed.

  In the game R270, since the decision notification flag is on, if the condition device is the internal winning result according to the AT1 type, in addition to the promotion display, the operation navigation (in the present example, seven 1 or seven 2) While performing the navigation which urges the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of), the preparation state is prepared to shift from the finalization state to the AT1 state.

  The game R268 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 268 and three bet games are played. In the game R268, as the normal effect, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Is continued. Further, in this game R268, since the decision notification flag is on in the decision notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the internal winning result (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3 in the present embodiment) It is determined whether it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is no. Since it is 4, operation navigation (In this example, navigation which urges reverse pushing operation aiming at the pattern of blue 7) is executed.

<Specific example of change of rights by reaching the ceiling>
Next, a specific example of the change of the right due to reaching the ceiling will be described using FIG. 76 to FIG. Each of FIGS. 76 to 77 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the user does not reach the ceiling in the determination notification state of the high navigation state.

  The game R 329 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 329, and is a game in a confirmation notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and is a game in which a three bet game is performed. In this game R329, a bonus confirmation display (in the present example, a display including the characters "Bonus confirmed!") Is issued as notification of transition to the AT1 state as a normal effect. Further, in this game R329, since the internal winning result is a loss, the rendering state is maintained in the finalized state.

  The following game R328 is a second game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328, and the confirmation notification state is a game in which a bet game is performed. In the game R328, a bonus confirmation display (in the present example, a display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Is continued as a normal effect. Also, in this game R328, the condition device is no. Since it was 3, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation prompting the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation status is prepared for transitioning from the confirmation notification status to the AT 1 status. Is going.

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalization state is 20, and a bet game is performed. In this game R327, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the BET operation has been performed), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157, so the AT1 state To perform the AT1 effect corresponding to, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction Since the count value of is 20, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the character of “20 G”) is executed.

  In this example, since the ceiling is not reached in the determined notification state of the high navigation state, the AT1 type is not changed from low to high (not promoted).

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects in the case of reaching the ceiling in the determined notification state of the high navigation state.

  The game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300, and the determined notification state. In this game R300, the ceiling counter after subtraction becomes a certain value (0 in this example), so it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the AT1 type is changed from low to high (promoted Yes). Further, in the game R300, a bonus confirmation display (in the present example, a display including the characters "Bonus confirmed!") For notifying transition to the AT1 state is executed as a normal effect. Furthermore, in the game R300, the condition device is No. Since it is 4, operation navigation (In this example, navigation which urges reverse pushing operation aiming at a symbol of Seven 1) is executed.

  In this example, the first right (a pseudo bonus with a low degree of profit) is acquired when the ceiling is reached in the finalized state of the high navigation state, and the second right (a pseudo bonus with a high degree of profit) is obtained. Because it is configured to be in the state of being acquired, even if the game from transitioning to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state becomes long after the awarding of bonus is decided It is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation.

<Example of other effects>
Next, another rendering example will be described using FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining another example of effect.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect when the three bet game is performed in the LMT state, and FIG. 78 (b) is the case where the two bet game is performed in the LMT state It is a figure showing an example of ED production of.

  According to the slot machine of the modification of the first embodiment, when the normal three bet game continues to be executed in the LMT state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the period of 20 games in the LMT state During, the ED effect is performed, and the end screen is executed in the final game. On the other hand, when the two bet game continues to be executed in the LMT state, the display of the end screen is continued as shown in FIG. 78 (b).

  FIG. 78 (c) is a view showing a modified example of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). In the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (D), the specific display is displayed using all the display areas of the effect image display device 157, but as shown in FIG. 78 (c), at least the first display area (this example) In the first display area, the display is switched in a certain period of time, and the first display area is provided with a plurality of display areas including the upper half display area) and the second display area (in this example, the lower half display area). The display area may be a display area in which the display is not switched in the certain period, and the specific display may be displayed in the first display area. With such a configuration, a specific display can be displayed in the first display area, while a certain display can be continuously displayed in the second display area, and the rendering effect can be enhanced. There is.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-1”) has operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 1). Transition to one of the stop buttons 137 to 139), the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) A game console provided with control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The information processing apparatus is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is a notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. Operation navigation used, shown in Figure 52 etc. A advantageous state than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation) using the effect image display device 157, the A operation navigation, a navigation for pushing forward combination, the first counters for advantageous conditions (for example, FIG. 18 and includes a high navigation state counter) shown in FIG. 52 or the like, said each time the game is performed in an advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as "first count value".) the updatable Configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain ending condition is satisfied, and the certain ending condition is that the first count value is a specific value. (e.g., 0) and when it becomes (e.g., the number of games from the transition to an advantageous state when it reaches the upper limit number of times) is a condition satisfied, in the preferred state, among the plurality of advantageous gaming state It is configured to be transitionable to any, and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 shown in FIG. 53), the first advantageous The game state is an advantageous game state capable of executing the operation navigation, and includes a second counter (for example, the effect state counter shown in FIG. 53) related to the first advantageous game state, and the first advantageous game state Every time a game is played in the second counter, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "the second count value") can be updated, and in the first advantageous gaming state The first game (for example, 3) in which the second count value is configured to be updatable, and the number of betted game media is the first number, even when a game that has not been won is played. Bet game and betting of gaming media A second game (for example, a two bet game) having a second number is configured to be executable, the second number being a number different from the first number, the advantage In the state, the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing a certain value ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIG. 79, one display of the plurality of types of displays includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display display "hereinafter. for example, a 30) of the numerical values shown in FIG. 79, the certain value is a value relating to the second count value, the first display is displayed in the first preferred gaming state After execution of the first game is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated and the second game is performed in the first game. display is configured to be displayed, after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when the execution of the second game is started, the first count value And the first count value of the second count value There the second display in the update has been said second game is configured not appear, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-1 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 1-1, when execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are used. Because only the first count value of the two is updated and the second display (the display including the image representing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second that was going to Yu technique of, it is possible to notify at ashamed no aspect for the player. In addition, since the first counter ( counter related to the advantageous state ) is updated in any of the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is correctly playing the first game. It is possible to secure the fairness of the player who is playing the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention 1-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 etc.) in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. It is a certain gaming state, and the certain value is a value indicating a value relating to the number of games played (for example, the number of remaining games) in the first advantageous gaming state, and one display of the plurality of types of displays Is a display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”) including an image indicating that the remaining game count in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as “the third display”), and When the second game is played, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display. Further, when the second count value reaches a predetermined value in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state may end.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the player is notified in a manner not embarrassing to the player that he / she has played a game which is disadvantageous to the player (the second game). It is possible to In addition, the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed, giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display By being displayed suddenly, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, one display of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display") including an image regarding an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state. The fourth display is a display including an image relating to the increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a display including characters such as “+20” or the number of remaining games “LAST5” to “LAST25” When the first game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed, and the first display in the first advantageous gaming state may be displayed. When the second game is played, the fourth display may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the fourth display may not be displayed when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, and the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state is displayed. By providing the player with the player, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, even if the first game is played after the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the first display is not displayed. The advantageous gaming state may end.

  With such a configuration, the player may be given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, because the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed. Thus, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like) , and is shifted to the second advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state The second advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state capable of executing the operation navigation , which is different from the first advantageous gaming state, in the first advantageous gaming state. When the first game is played after the second game is played, the first advantageous game state ends without the third display being displayed, and the second advantageous game state May start.

  With such a configuration, the player may be given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed. Therefore, while carefully selecting the bet number of game media in the subsequent games, the second advantageous game state may start when the second game is returned to the first game. The player who has returned to the first game can be provided with a privilege, and the game intention can be sustained.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  Further, the above-mentioned "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state" means "the first display in a certain state in the advantageous state. If the execution of the first game is started after the is displayed, the execution of the second game starts after the above-mentioned "the first display is displayed in the advantageous state." The case of “when being played” may be “when the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state”. In addition, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the above-mentioned "advantage state," the count value is updated and the first game is performed in the first game. The second display is configured to be displayable, "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is set. Is configured to be updated and the second display is displayed in the first game.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 1-2”) has an operation means (for example, the stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the game console provided with the main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3, and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. The information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation etc. using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 etc. is configured to be able to be notified, and the advantageous state is notification of the operation information Is more advantageous than the normal condition It is a state, and is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), and whenever a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter is updated It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied, and the certain termination condition is that the count value is the first specific one. It is a condition that holds when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and the bet number of game media is the first number It is configured to be able to execute a first game (for example, three bet games) and a second game (for example, two bet games) in which the bet number of game media is a second number, and the second Is different from the first number In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and in the advantageous state, a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) When the game is the first game, the count value is updated and the first value is updated if a certain condition is satisfied at the start of the game. In the game, the execution of the specific effect is configured to be startable, and the count value is satisfied when the game is the second game when the certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution. Is configured to be updated so that execution of the specific effect is not started in the second game. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-2 of the present application.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention 1-2, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention 1-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect may be started on condition of the shift.

  Also, the certain requirement is that the second count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player.

  In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 etc.) in the advantageous state, and the second advantageous gaming state may be capable of notifying the operation information It is a gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that can be shifted after the number of times played since reaching the advantageous state reaches a certain number, and the second advantageous gaming state is the gaming state The game state may be stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the specific effect may be an effect that can be performed in the second advantageous game state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in subsequent games by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Moreover, when it transfers to the said 2nd advantageous game state, without moving into the said advantageous state and the said 2nd game will not be performed (henceforth "the 1st case"), it is said 2nd advantageous. The maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number, and after transitioning to the advantageous state and then transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state after the second game is performed (Hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous gaming state may be the second number of times, the said first number than the first number The second number is a smaller number, and the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed A display corresponding to the first number (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), In one case, the first display is displayed when transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state, and in the second case, transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state The display may be configured to display the first display.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in subsequent games by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Moreover, it is comprised so that transfer to the 1st advantageous game state is possible in the said advantageous state, and the said 1st advantageous game state can alert | report the said operation information different from the said 2nd advantageous game state. A display that includes an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as “second If the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state ends without the second display being displayed. There may be.

  In addition, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without the specific effect being performed.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without a specific effect being performed, and by giving the player an impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to perform in subsequent games. It is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without notification of advantageous information for the player, thereby giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) can be started in the advantageous state, and the specific effect is an effect related to the certain freeze effect It is also good.

  The display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means is a first display (for example, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, 79 is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display is a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, 30 of the numerical value shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image indicating a certain remaining game number (for example, 29 of the numerical value shown in FIG. 79), and the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without the first display being displayed.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the player is notified in a manner not embarrassing to the player that he / she has played a game which is disadvantageous to the player (the second game). It is possible to In addition, the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed, giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display By being displayed suddenly, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 1-3”) has an operation means (for example, stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the game console provided with the main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3, and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. The information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation etc. using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 etc. is configured to be able to be notified, and the advantageous state is notification of the operation information Is more advantageous than the normal condition It is a state, and is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), and whenever a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter is updated It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied, and the certain termination condition is that the count value is the first specific one. It is a condition that holds when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and the bet number of game media is the first number It is configured to be able to execute a first game (for example, three bet games) and a second game (for example, two bet games) in which the bet number of game media is a second number, and the second Is different from the first number In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and a freeze effect is produced in the advantageous state (for example, the freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) When the game is the first game, the count value is updated and the first value is updated if a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution. In the case of playing a game, the execution of the certain freeze effect is configured to be startable, and when the certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution, the game is the second game, The game machine is characterized in that the count value is updated so that execution of the certain freeze effect is not started in the second game. FIG. 81 is a view showing an outline of Invention 1-3 of the present application.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention 1-3, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention 1-3 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect may be started on condition of the shift.

  Also, the certain requirement is that the second count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player.

  In addition, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, LMT state shown in FIG. 6 etc.), and the second advantageous game The state is a game state in which the operation information can be notified, and the second advantageous game state is a game state that can be transferred after the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state has reached a certain number of times The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which it is possible to stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect is started to execute in connection with the transition to the second advantageous gaming state The effect may be

  With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in subsequent games by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Moreover, when it transfers to the said 2nd advantageous game state, without moving into the said advantageous state and the said 2nd game will not be performed (henceforth "the 1st case"), it is said 2nd advantageous. The maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number, and after transitioning to the advantageous state and then transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state after the second game is performed (Hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous gaming state may be the second number of times, the said first number than the first number The second number is a smaller number, and the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed A display corresponding to the first number (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), In one case, the first display is displayed when transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state, and in the second case, transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state The display may be configured to display the first display.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in subsequent games by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Moreover, it is comprised so that transfer to the 1st advantageous game state is possible in the said advantageous state, and the said 1st advantageous game state can alert | report the said operation information different from the said 2nd advantageous game state. A display that includes an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as “second If the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state ends without the second display being displayed. There may be.

  In addition, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without the certain freeze effect being performed.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without a certain freeze effect being performed, and by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to play the following games. It is possible to make the selection of the bet number of game media be carefully made. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, execution of a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started in the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect may be an effect associated with the specific effect Good.

  Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without notification of advantageous information for the player, thereby giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means is a first display (for example, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, 79 is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display is a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, 30 of the numerical value shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image indicating a certain remaining game number (for example, 29 of the numerical value shown in FIG. 79), and the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without the first display being displayed.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the player is notified in a manner not embarrassing to the player that he / she has played a game which is disadvantageous to the player (the second game). It is possible to In addition, the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed, giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display By being displayed suddenly, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 1-4”) has an operation means (for example, stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the game console provided with the main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3, and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. The information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation etc. using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 etc. is configured to be able to be notified, and the advantageous state is notification of the operation information Is more advantageous than the normal condition It is a state, and is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), and whenever the game is played in the advantageous state It is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is met, and the certain termination condition is that the count value is a specific value (for example, , 0) (for example, when the number of games after transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number) is a condition that is satisfied, the first bet number of gaming media is the first number It is configured to be able to execute a game (for example, three bet game) and a second game (for example, two bet game) in which the bet number of game media is the second number, and the second number is , A number different from the first number In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and in the advantageous state, the first advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6, etc.) And is configured to be able to execute a certain effect related to the end of the first advantageous game state (for example, the end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 82), in the advantageous state the first When only a game is played, it is configured to shift to the first advantageous gaming state and the certain effect may be executed, and only the second game is performed in the advantageous state. In the case of being performed, the game is characterized in that the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-4 of the present application.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention 1-4, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game which is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being performed. Further, by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets of game media in the subsequent games.

  The gaming machine according to Invention 1-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means is a difference between the game medium inserted by the player and the game medium acquired by the player. It is a means capable of displaying the difference sheet number indication, and when the difference sheet number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the difference sheet number display, and in the advantageous state, When only the second game is played, the expected value of the difference number is configured to be less than 0, and the above is executed when only the second game is played in the advantageous state. Even in the effect, the difference number display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. Further, by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets of game media in the subsequent games.

  Further, even if the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. May be

  With such a configuration, a certain effect may be executed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, thereby giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 etc.), and the second advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state If the first game is played after the second game is played in the advantageous state, the second game is performed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. It may be configured to shift to the two advantageous game states and to execute the certain effect.

  With such a configuration, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state may occur without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, and the end effect may be executed, thereby losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. By giving the player an impressive impression, he / she carefully selects the bet number of game media in the subsequent games, while the second advantageous game state is when returning from the second game to the first game. By having the possibility of starting, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and the game intention can be maintained.

  In addition, the above-mentioned "a certain effect related to the end of the first advantageous game state" may be "a certain effect related to the end of the advantageous state".

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 1-5”) has an operation means (for example, stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and lottery means for internally winning the winning combination and determining the lottery result (eg, winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. The operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52 etc. Stop of each reel It is configured to be able to notify the information that can identify the position and the stopping order, and the advantageous state is an advantageous state over the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, , And the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 52, etc., and is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain end condition is satisfied. If the count value is a specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., in the advantageous state), it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state. It is a condition that is established when the number of games since transition has reached the upper limit number of times, and the combination is a special game (for example, the special game shown in FIG. 6A or 43A) when winning. State Includes a special part that can be played, and is configured to be shiftable to an advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 etc.) in the advantageous state, and an effect related to the termination of the certain advantageous gaming state (For example, the termination effect fn1 shown in FIG. 83) is configured to be executable, the transition to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, and the execution of the termination effect can be started, If a game is played in a state where the special combination is internally won, the execution of the certain effect can be started without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state It is a game stand characterized by being. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-5 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-5, even if the advantageous state is ended without being able to align the symbols relating to the special part, it is possible to make the player feel that it has shifted to an advantageous certain gaming state. It is possible to reduce feelings of regret and immorality. In addition, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming machine according to Invention 1-5 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means is a difference between the game medium inserted by the player and the game medium acquired by the player. It is a means capable of displaying a difference sheet number indication, and when the difference sheet number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the difference sheet number display, or The difference number display may be displayed even if the certain effect is executed without shifting to the advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by emphasizing the small number of acquired sheets, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of game media in the subsequent game by giving the player the impression of losing. In addition, since the player who is correctly playing the game has a relatively large number of wins, the sense of superiority of such a player can be satisfied.

Further, in the certain effect which is executed without shifting to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, the notification regarding the special combination is not performed even in a state in which the special combination is internally won. May be configured.
With such a configuration, it may be possible to satisfy superiority's sense of superiority.

  Further, the above-mentioned "a certain effect relating to the end of the certain advantageous gaming state" may be "a certain effect relating to the end of the advantageous state".

  In addition, the first game where the bet number of game media is the first number and the second game where the bet number of game media is the second number are configured to be executable, and the second number Is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the role is a game medium Including a replay role that can play a game without being inserted, in a certain control state, the win of the replay role in the second game than the win probability of the replay role in the first game The probability may be higher than the probability of winning.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state and the internal winning combination is made to the special role, the certain effect can be obtained without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. The execution may be configured to start.

  In the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 1-6"), the bet number of game media is the first number. It is configured to be able to execute one game (for example, three bet games) and a second game (for example, two bet games) in which the bet number of game media is the second number. The number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and it is a plurality of games. A certain effect (for example, interlocking effect shown in FIG. 84) is configured to be executable, and the certain effect is an effect including effects of a plurality of scenes, and one of the effects of the plurality of scenes The scene rendering is the rendering of the first scene (for example, the first scene shown in FIG. 84). The effect of one of the effects of the plurality of scenes is an effect of a second scene (for example, the second scene shown in FIG. 84), and the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed If execution of the first game is started after that, execution of the effects of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the effects of the first scene are When execution of the second game is started after the played game, execution of the rendering of the second scene is not started in the second game, characterized in that It is a game stand. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-6 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 1-6, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player.

  The gaming machine according to Invention 1-6 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, in the case where the second game is performed after the game in which the first scene is rendered, and the execution of the first game is started thereafter, in the first game The execution of the rendering of the second scene may be configured to be startable.

  With this configuration, the player who has returned from the second game to the first game can enjoy the flow of the correct presentation.

  In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the first scene is rendered, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. The execution of the scene rendering may not be started but the execution of another certain rendering may be started.

  With such a configuration, a certain other effect is suddenly executed to strongly impress the effect on the player, and the player who returned to the first game is again subjected to the first game. You can reconfirm what you were doing.

  In addition, when execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, execution of the second scene is not started in the second game. The execution of at least a part of the rendering of the first scene may be configured to be startable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) which is disadvantageous to the player in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player notice that the second game is being performed by giving the player a sense of discomfort by the effect being repeatedly performed. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to make the player be more aware of the bet number of game media by attracting the player's attention, making the effect be a rare effect in which the same effect is repeated.

  In addition, operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to notify the stop position and the stop order of the information), and the advantageous state is an advantageous state over the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter related to the advantageous state For example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and an end condition is When it is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is that the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (example For example, when the number of games after transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), the above-mentioned condition of “the first game is performed after the game in which the rendering of the first scene is performed. When the execution is started, in the first game, the execution of the effect of the second scene is configured to be able to be started, "means that" the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed When execution of the first game is started after the second game, the second count value is updated, and execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, If the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the effect of the second scene in the second game is Is configured not to start the execution of “the When execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the second game is performed, the second count value is updated and the execution of the effect of the second scene in the second game is started It may be configured to be "not".

  With such a configuration, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three bet game) in which the bet number of game media is the first number, and a second game (for example, two bets) in which the bet number of game media is the second number Game is configured to be executable, the second number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more than the second game The game is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing a certain effect (for example, the linked effect shown in FIG. 63 or the linked effect shown in FIG. 64D) over a plurality of games, Effects are effects including a plurality of scenes, and one of the effects of the plurality of scenes is a first scene (for example, a scene of "enemy attack" shown in FIG. 63, or 64 (D), and the effect of the first scene was performed. When execution of the first game is started after the trick, the first scene is continuously produced in the first game and is configured to be executable, and the first scene is displayed. Is configured such that, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the second game is played, the presentation of the first scene is not continuously executed in the second game, It may be a game stand as a feature.

  According to such a play arcade, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game which is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player.

  In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the first scene is rendered, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. The execution of the rendering of one scene may be configured to be startable.

  In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the first scene is rendered, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. The execution of one scene rendering may not be started, but the execution of another certain rendering may be started.

  In addition, when execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, execution of the second scene is not started in the second game. The execution of at least a part of the rendering of the first scene may be configured to be startable.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 1-7”) has an operation means (for example, stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the first game (for example, three bet game) in which the bet number of game media is the first number, and the game medium is a gaming table provided with the main control unit 300) shown in FIG. The second game is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-game bet game) in which the bet number is a second number, the second number being a number different from the first number, In the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played by the player than the second game. Operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc. Of the stop position and stop order of each of the reels can be notified), the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, the advantageous state Specific counter (for example, high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), and every time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as “specific count value” Is configured to be updatable, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, the certain end condition being Is a condition that is satisfied when the value of the game becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), a counter related to the advantageous state (For example, a ceiling counter shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 19, FIG. 68, etc.), and every time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as "a certain count value") Is configured to be updatable, and when the certain count value reaches a certain value (e.g., 0), a particular advantageous state (e.g., the particular advantageous state or the diagram shown in FIG. 85) which is advantageous for the player. 68 is configured to shift to the AT1 state shown in 68 etc., and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state, both of the specific count value and the certain count value are performed. Count value updated It is possible to configure, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, only the specific count value of the specific count value and the certain count value can be updated. The game stand is characterized by FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-7 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-7, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game Can be secured. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected to correct the player who did not play the game correctly.

  The gaming machine according to the invention 1-7 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the special advantageous state may be transitioned to in the advantageous state. It is also good.

  With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play can be sustained by making it possible to award a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

  In addition, when the number of times of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds a certain number of times, there is no case that the special advantageous state is entered even if the first game is performed in the advantageous state. It may be configured as follows.

  With such a configuration, while the second game is permitted for the player who made a count error or the like in the number of games, the player who played the second game with malicious intent (for example, searching for a capture method) Etc.) by giving a benefit to a player who plays an irregular game, etc., thereby giving priority to the player who is correctly performing the first game and correcting the player who has played the second game. Can be expected.

  Also, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state capable of notifying the operation information, and the specific advantageous state May be a state relating to the transition to the first advantageous gaming state.

  Further, in the advantageous state, transition to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, LMT state shown in FIG. 6 etc.) is possible, and the second advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. The second game is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state when the specific count value reaches a third value (for example, 20). The third value is another value, and the first game is played in the advantageous state even if the number of times of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds the certain number of times. In some cases, it may be configured such that the second advantageous gaming state may be transitioned to before the advantageous state ends.

  With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play can be sustained by making it possible to award a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 1-8”) has an operation means (for example, stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, a game console comprising a main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3 and display means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, said operation means Operation information (for example, operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) Informable information) can be notified The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter regarding the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or 52 etc.) And is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and transitions from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain ending condition is satisfied. Are configured as described above, and when the count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), the certain end condition A first game where the bet number of game media is the first number (for example, 3 bet games), and a second game where the bet number of game media is the second number (For example, 2 bets Game is configured to be executable, the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more than the second game. It is a game advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be shiftable to an advantageous gaming state of any of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and an advantageous game of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states The state is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is , The second advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86, the judge state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and in the first advantageous gaming state over the second advantageous gaming state Is advantageous to the player, and the first advantage After the game state is over, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous game state, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed when the first advantageous game state is ended. Display (hereinafter referred to as the “first display”. For example, it is a first display d1) shown in FIG. 86, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, “second display” For example, it is a second display d2) shown in FIG. 86, and one display of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter referred to as “third display”. For example, it is the third display d1 shown in FIG. 86), and when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed When the count value is updated and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed , The count value is updated and the third display in the game is Viewable a configuration,

It is a game stand characterized by. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-8 of the present application.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention 1-8, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game which is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a mode that is not ashamed of the player. Since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

  The gaming machine according to Invention 1-8 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Thus, for example, the second indication may be an indication regarding the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

  Further, the second display is a display configured of displays of a plurality of scenes, and the display of one of the displays of the plurality of scenes is a display of a first scene. The display of one of the displays of the scene is a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is a display whose display is started by an operation related to the progress of the game. The display of the second scene may be a display that is started by a certain operation related to the progress of the game, which is performed subsequent to the certain operation.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

  In addition, the lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result is provided. The display mode may change in relation to the lottery result in the game in which the display of the second display is started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-9”) has an operation means (for example, the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 139) and lottery processing for internal winning of a combination, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) and a normal state (for example, FIG. Control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to any one of the low navigation state shown in and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B); A gaming table provided with privilege giving means (for example, AT number addition lottery of AT2 state processing A shown in FIG. 23) capable of giving a privilege regarding the advantageous state in an advantageous state, comprising a certain counter (for example, 87 A ceiling counter shown in FIG. 19, FIG. 68, etc.) is provided, and the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter, referred to as a certain count value) can be updated each time a game is played. It is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, BB state or AT1 state shown in FIG. 43 (b) etc.) in the advantageous state, and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state (eg BB internal) After the winning or the right to shift to the AT1 state is obtained, a winning notification (for example, the bonus confirmation notification bk1 shown in FIG. 87, the bonus confirmation display shown in FIG. 68, FIG. 70 etc. shown in FIG. (The display of the image including the characters "Bonus confirmed!") Is started, and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state is the first symbol (for example, FIG. a) and shown in FIG. The right (hereinafter referred to as “first right”, for example, pseudo bonus 1 shown in FIG. 87) and the second two symbols (eg, FIG. 4 (a) and FIG. 87) shown in FIG. Rights (hereinafter referred to as “second rights”; for example, the pseudo bonus 2 shown in FIG. 87), and the second right is more advantageous for the player than the first right. In the state where the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started, the first notification is generated when the first result is determined as a result of the internal winning. The second result is determined as a result of the internal winning in the state where the execution of the second is possible after the execution of the winning notification is started and the second right is acquired. The second notification execution is configured to be able to start when The first result is that the first symbol is displayed when the operation means is operated according to the contents of the first notification (for example, the effective line shown in FIG. 87 or FIG. 4 (b) It is a result (or is displayed on a pay line other than an effective line), and the second result is displayed when the operation means is operated in accordance with the content of the second notification. (E.g., displayed on a pay line (or a pay line other than the pay line shown in FIG. 87 or FIG. 4 (b))) after the execution of the winning notification is started, In a state from the state in which the first right is acquired to the transition to the advantageous game state, the first count value when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0); The second right from the state where the right of Is configured to be in a state of being acquired, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-9 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine relating to the present invention 1-9, it is possible to play a game with a sense of expectation even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long.

  The gaming machine according to Invention 1-9 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first right is acquired and then the second right is acquired, the first notification may not be executed.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three bet game) in which the bet number of game media is the first number, and a second game (for example, two bets) in which the bet number of game media is the second number Game), and the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state (or / and the normal state), the second number is more than the second game. The first game is a game advantageous to the player, and the first game is performed in a state in which the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started. In this case, the certain count value is configured to be updatable, and after the execution of the winning notification is started, the second game is performed in a state where the first right is acquired. And if configured, the certain count value is not updated. It can have.

  With such a configuration, since the counters related to the advantageous state are updated, it is possible to secure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible. In addition, it is also possible to expect the player who did not play the game correctly to correct the game method by giving preferential treatment to the player who has played the game correctly in the first game. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to notify the stop position and the stop order of the information), and the advantageous state is an advantageous state over the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter related to the advantageous state For example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, etc.) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as "specific count value") is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is that the specific count value is It is a condition that is satisfied when a fixed value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), the certain counter is the specific counter. Is a counter related to the advantageous state, the certain count value is a value that can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and the first game is executed in the advantageous state When the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the count value of both the specific count value and the certain count value is configured to be able to be updated. Only the specific count value of the specific count value and the certain count value may be configured to be updatable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is also possible to expect the player who did not play the game correctly to correct the game method by giving preferential treatment to the player who has played the game correctly in the first game. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the part includes a re-playing part capable of playing a game regardless of the insertion of game media, and in a certain control state, the second one is more than the winning probability of the re-playing part in the first game. The winning probability of the replay role may be higher in the second game.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, the three-piece game) after performing the second game (for example, the two-piece game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the award of the award to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the specific count value can be updated, and the winning probability of the replay role may be higher than the normal state.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail using the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid the redundant description, only the configuration different from the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described in principle. Further, FIGS. 88 to 96 are basically used only for the description of the second embodiment, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIGS. The code shown in 96 takes precedence.

<AT2 state process A>
First, AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, which corresponds to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1451 to S1453 are added to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1451, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1453. In step S1452, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), after performing AT number addition lottery 1 using the lottery value corresponding to "LMT standby flag off", the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1453, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), after performing AT number addition lottery 2 using the lottery value corresponding to "LMT standby flag on", the process proceeds to step S1402.

  As described above, in this example, the number of AT-added games in the AT2 state is made different according to the state of the LMT standby flag. Specifically, when the LMT standby flag is off, the number of AT-added games is selected in the range of 0 G to 100 G according to the internally winning combination, but when the LMT standby flag is on, the internal winning is achieved. Depending on the role, select the number of AT-added games in the range of 0G to 10G. That is, in the AT2 state, when the LMT standby flag is on (when transitioning from the AT2 state to the LMT state), the AT is higher than when the LMT standby flag is off (when not transitioning from the AT2 state to the LMT state). It is configured to reduce the number of added games.

<Judge status processing B>
Next, the judgment state process B according to the second embodiment will be described using FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the judge state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the judge state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the judge state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2251 to S2253 are added to the judgment state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2251, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied, and if it is not satisfied (if correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2203, and if it is satisfied (correction is not If it is necessary, the process proceeds to step S2252.

  Here, the determination as to whether the correction condition is satisfied in step S2251 (correction condition determination) is performed in the following procedure. In the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202, one of the AT2 initial number specified in the AT2 initial number lottery table shown in FIG. 89 (b) is selected. Subsequently, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the determination is acquired, and the AT2 initial number of times selected in step S2202 is selected from the value X of the high navigation state counter. Subtract the initial number (Y). When the value after subtraction (X−Y) is equal to or less than the first determination value (100 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  In addition, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the difference sheet number (A) at the time of the determination is acquired, and the difference sheet number (A) corresponds to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery of step S2202. Subtract the expected number (B). Then, even when the value after subtraction (A−B) is less than or equal to the second determination value (1500 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  In step 2252, the AT 2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S 2253, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S 2204. Here, the AT correction value in step S2252 is calculated by adding a certain value (20 in this example) to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery of step S2202. Therefore, for example, when the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of correction condition determination is 100 and the AT2 initial number (Y) selected by the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, the correction condition is satisfied. In step S2252, 50 (= AT2 initial number (Y) 30 + 20 selected by AT2 initial number lottery) is set as an AT2 correction value.

  In the judge state process B according to the second embodiment, the lottery value (the number of pullbacks G) is set to the effect state counter in the pullback state in step S2206, but as shown in FIG. In the case where the lottery value (the number of pullbacks G) is 1G, the degree of expectation to pullback is higher than in the case where the number is 2 to 9G.

<AT2 state process B>
Next, AT2 state processing B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a flow of AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2351 to S2353 are added to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2351, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2352. In step S2352, the value of LMT initial value + 1 is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2353, after the LMT state is set in the effect state, the process proceeds to step 2306.

  As described above, in this example, in the judge state (judge state process B shown in FIG. 89), when the AT2 state is set to the effect state and the LMT standby flag is set to ON, the AT2 state is set. It is configured to transition to the LMT state.

<Withdrawal state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a), the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the pullback state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2451 to S2453 are added to the pullback state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2451, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied, and if it is not satisfied (if correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2403 and if it is satisfied (correction is not If necessary, the process proceeds to step S2452. Note that the correction condition determination (determination as to whether or not the correction condition is satisfied) executed in step S2451 is the same as step S2251 of the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. Is omitted.

  In step 2452, the AT 2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S 2453, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S 2404.

  FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram showing an example of transition of the AT state in the high navigation state. FIG. 91 (b) (1) shows a typical transition example of the AT state, which is an example of transition in the order of AT 1 state (20 G) → AT 2 state (30 G to 100 G).

  On the other hand, FIG. 91 (b) (2) shows another transition example of the AT state, where AT1 state (20 G) → judge state → AT 2 state (30 G to 100 G) → pull back state → AT 2 state (10 G) This is an example of transition in order. In this example, the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. The number of AT2 state games shifted from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

  Further, FIGS. 91 (b) and (3) show another transition example of the AT state, in which AT1 state (20G) → judge state → AT2 state (30G to 100G) → drawback state → AT3 state (10G) This is an example of transition in order. In this example, the AT state shifted from the pull-back state is an AT3 state different from the AT1 state or the AT2 state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. Note that the number of AT3 state games shifted from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

<Specific example of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described. Each of FIG. 92 to FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows the effect aspect of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<AT2 state → judge state → pull back state → low navigation state>
FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of effects in the case of transition to the normal state in the low navigation state after the transition in the order of AT2 state → judge state → pullback state in the high navigation state.

  The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In this game R328, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , Perform the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) indicating the stop operation, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter Is being executed, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) is executed (in this example, a display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G") .

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1. In this game R327, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is performed as in the game R328, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, The display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G" is executed.

  The following game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is performed similarly to the game R328 to the game R327, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) In the example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G" is executed.

  Also, in this game R326, it is the final game of the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). , While executing the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, and executing the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of obtained game media) in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased.

  The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, the effect state is judged from the state AT2 using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (such as immediately after the BET)). Since the transition to the state, the judgment effect corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, so the number of games (effect state counter (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 10G”) is performed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R 325 (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is a judge state using the effect image display device 157 From the above, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is executed, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of effect state counter) is 9, so an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”).

  The games R315 to R314 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 to 314, and the number of remaining games in the pulling back state shifted from the judge state is 1 to 0. In this game R315 to game R314, the effect state is judged from the judge state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition to the pullback state is made, the normal screen (pullback) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed. Further, after the game R314 ends, the high navigation state pullback state ends, and the game transitions to the low navigation state normal state, and using the effect image display device 157, the normal screen corresponding to the low navigation state normal state ( Normal) is displayed.

  The display mode of the normal screen (normal) may be at least partially the same as the display mode of the normal screen (pull-back), or all may be different from the display mode of the normal screen (pull-back). Moreover, when displaying the screen of the same display mode, it is preferable that the probability that the screen is displayed in the pullback state is higher than the probability that the screen is displayed in the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state>
FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of effects in the case of transition to the normal state in the low navigation state after the transition in the order of the AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state.

  The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R69, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is performed similarly to the immediately preceding game R71 to the game R70, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) (In this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is executed.

  Also, in this game R69, it is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). , While executing the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, and executing the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of obtained game media) in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased.

  The game R68 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 68 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19. In this game R68, the rendering state changes from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition has been made, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and at the same time, the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is suggested to indicate the stop operation. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the rendering state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (rendering state counter Is displayed (in this example, the display of an image including the characters of "20/20"). The filling of the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not been performed yet at the same timing.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R68 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in L and the number of remaining games in LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) (in this example, display of an image including characters of "after 19/20") There is. In addition, since the flow of the effects of the game R67 to the game R50 is almost the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R49 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 49 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is zero. In this game R49, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Execute display (In this example, display of an image including characters of “0/20” in the present example) including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of presentation state counter) ing.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is established in this game R49 (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation), this is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the obtained number of gaming media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed while The display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters of "after 0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, after the game R49 ends, the LMT state in the high navigation state ends, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed, and using the effect image display device 157, the normal screen (corresponding to the normal state in the low navigation state Normal) is displayed.

  In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (in this example, the AT2 state) is finished, transition to the fourth advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judgment state or the pulling back state) is possible, After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (in this example, the LMT state), it is configured to shift to the normal state (in the present example, the low navigation state), and the effects in the second advantageous gaming state (this example) In the AT2 effect mode, the mode is different from the effect mode (in this example, the ED effect) in the third advantageous game state.

  According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

<AT2 state → judge state → pullback state → AT2 state>
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the effect state is shifted in the order of AT2 state → judge state → pullback state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, using FIG. 92 (a) It shows the continuation of the described effects.

  The game R315 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315, and the number of remaining games in the pulling back state shifted from the judge state is 1, and the specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role This is a game in which the game is shifted to the AT2 state from the next game since the internal winning in 3). In this game R315, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state changes from the judge state to the pullback state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, the normal screen (pull back) corresponding to the pull back state is displayed.

  The following game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 314 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is 9. In the game R314, the effect state is judged from the judge state using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (eg immediately after the BET)). Since the state has shifted to the state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before updating is 50. A display including an image indicating the count value of the effect state counter (in this example, display of an image including the characters “50 G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R 314 (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT 2 state using the effect image display device 157 From the fact that the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the game number (count value of the effect state counter) (In this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 49G").

  In this example, when transitioning from the withdrawal state to the AT state, transition to the AT2 state that is more advantageous for the player than the AT1 state is configured. In addition, although illustration is omitted, when 3 bets are played after 2 bets are played in the pullback state, it shifts to another high navigation state (for example, LMT state) without shifting to the AT2 state May. Although illustration is omitted, when the two bet game is continued in the pullback state, the high navigation state may end without the transition to the AT2 state and the transition to the low navigation state may occur.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state → normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state>
In FIG. 93 (b), after the rendering state transitions in the order of AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state, transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is made and transition to the high navigation state again, the rendering state is the normal state → FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flow of effects in the case of transition in the order of a confirmed notification state → AT1 state, and shows a continuation of the effects described using FIG. 92 (b).

  In this example, after transitioning to the normal state in the low navigation state, transition is again made to the high navigation state, and the rendering state is transitioned in the order of normal state → confirmation notification state → AT1 state.

  The game R658 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 658, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalization state is 19. In this game R658, using the effect image display device 157, the effect state is determined from the confirmation state until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (such as immediately after the BET)). Since the transition to the AT1 state is started, the AT1 effect corresponding to the start of the AT1 state is started, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state before updating (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. A display including an image showing (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the characters “20 G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R658 (in this example, the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157 From the fact that the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 19G”).

  In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (in this example, the AT2 state) is finished, transition to the fourth advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judgment state or the pulling back state) is possible, After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (in this example, the LMT state), it is configured to shift to the normal state (in the present example, the low navigation state), and the effects in the second advantageous gaming state (this example) Then, the AT2 effect) is a mode different from the effect (in this example, the ED effect) in the third advantageous gaming state, and the operation information from the fourth advantageous gaming state (judge status or withdrawal status) When it shifts to the game state which can be notified, it is constituted to shift to the 2nd advantageous game state (AT2 state), from the state after the 3rd advantageous game state (LMT state) ends Transition to the game state where the operation information can be reported Case, (in this example, AT1 state) first advantageous gaming state is configured to shift to.

  According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, expectations can be given even after the end of the advantageous game state that can be expected.

  Further, in this example, when transitioning from the LMT state to the low navigation state, transitioning to the high navigation state again and transitioning to the AT state in the high navigation state, the AT1 state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT2 state. Configured to migrate.

<Notice on establishment of combination in AT2 state>
FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a combination is established in the AT2 state.

  The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In this game R328, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , Perform the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and execute the operation navigation (in this example, the display of "2-1-3") indicating the stop operation of the pushing order, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state Since (the count value of the effect status counter) is 2, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the performance status counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the characters “LAST 2G”) Running.

  The following game R 327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT 2 state is increased from 1 to 51. In this game R327, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). , The AT 2 effect corresponding to the AT 2 state is performed, and a specification impossible display g2 (in this example, "!-!-!"!) Which can not specify the internally winning combination (for example, the watermelon of the small combination 3) Is executed, and the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in AT2 state before being added is 1, so a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of effect state counter) (this example In the above, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G" is executed.

  Further, in this game R327, the effect image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the indeterminate display, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the acceptance of the third stop operation), and then the number of AT-added games And the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is increased from 1 to 51 by the AT addition (in this example, the display of the characters "+ 50G"). A display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 51G”) is executed.

  In addition, the display mode of non-specification indication is not limited to this example, for example, the first internal non-indication indication (for example, "!-!-!"!) Of the second part or the third part of the same type by displaying the second indeterminate display (for example, the display of "?-?-?") It may be configured that the internal winning can not be identified. In addition, the internal winning of the different first part or fourth part is performed with the first non-specifiable display (for example, the display of "!-!-!"), And the second part or third part of the same type. The internal winning of any combination may not be specified by performing the internal winning of in the second indeterminate display (for example, the display of "?-?-?").

<Notice on establishment of combination in LMT state>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state.

  The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1. In this game R50, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , And an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state, as well as an operation navigation indicating the stop operation of the pushing order (in this example, "2-1-3" in the same display mode as the operation navigation in the AT2 state Is displayed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, so the total number of games in the LMT state and the LMT state A display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including characters of "after 2/20" Running.

  Further, in this game R50, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that a certain period of time has elapsed after the depression of the start lever 135 has been accepted), using the effect image display device 157, While executing an identifiable display g1 (in this example, a display of a watermelon symbol) capable of specifying the winning combination (for example, watermelon of the small winning combination 3), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (rendering state counter) (1), the display including the image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) is executed (in this example, the display of the image including the characters of “after 1/20”) ing.

  Furthermore, in the game R327, the identifiable display is erased in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). Note that, in this example, unlike the notification at the time when the winning combination is established in the AT2 state described with reference to FIG. 94 (a), it is indicated that there is no AT addition (regulation).

  In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (in this example, the AT2 state) is finished, transition to the fourth advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judgment state or the pulling back state) is possible, After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (in this example, the LMT state), it is configured to shift to the normal state (in the present example, the low navigation state), and the effects in the second advantageous gaming state (this example) Then, the AT2 effect) is a mode different from the effect (in this example, the ED effect) in the third advantageous gaming state, and the lottery result is first in the third advantageous gaming state (LMT state). In the case of the combination (in this example, the small combination 2 (watermelon 1)), it is possible to notify the first notification (in this example, the display of the watermelon symbol) which can identify the first combination. And in the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), the lottery result is the first role. Case, (in this example, "! -! -!" Display) a second notification indicating that the chances are informed configured to be able to.

  According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous game state that can be expected, the player is made to play a game by giving a sense of expectation, and in the advantageous game state in the restricted state, the player is not beaten, dropping is prevented and the advantageous state is ended pleasantly. It can be done.

  In addition, the display mode of the identifiable display is not limited to this example, for example, characters suggesting the name of the character (for example, characters "Rep" suggesting replay, characters "watermelon" suggesting minor character 3) May be displayed, or some or all of the symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the combination may be displayed. In addition, the display area of each display, the display position, the display size, the display timing, the presentation mode after display, and the like may be different between the non-specifiable display and the non-identifiable display.

<Specific Example of Correction of AT2 Initial Number>
Next, a specific example of the correction of the initial number of AT 2 times described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 will be described.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of cases / Case of correction>
FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of effects in the case of performing correction of the initial number of times of AT2.
The game R120 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 120 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state is zero. In this game R120, in the judgment state process B described with reference to FIG. 89 (a), after performing the AT2 initial number lottery, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied by the correction condition determination, and the AT2 initial number is corrected. ing. Specifically, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of correction condition determination is 120, and the AT2 initial number (Y) selected by the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, "X (= 120)-Y Since the correction condition of (= 30) <= 100 ”is satisfied, Y (= 30) + 20 = 50 is set as the AT2 correction value, and the LMT standby flag is set on.

  The game R119 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 119 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the judge state is 50. In this game R119, in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), since the LMT standby flag is on, the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed. Internally elected to watermelon 1), and has selected 0G as the number of AT-added games.

  Further, in the game R119, the effect state is judged as a judgment state using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (such as immediately after the BET)). Since the transition to the AT2 state is started, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state before updating (count value of the effect state counter) is 50. A display including an image indicating a number (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “50 G”) is performed.

  Thereafter, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is met in this game R119 (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 From the fact that the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the game number (count value of the effect state counter) (In this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 49G").

  The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R69, in the AT2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 90, since the AT2 state is ended and the LMT standby flag is on, preparation is made to shift the rendering state from the AT2 state to the LMT state. ing. In addition, in this game R69, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is performed similarly to the game R119 to the game R70, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) (In this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is executed.

  Furthermore, in this game R69, it is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). , While executing the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, and executing the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of obtained game media) in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In the present embodiment, the result display 1 may not be displayed, or the result display 1 may be performed only when the correction of the initial number of AT 2 is not performed.

  In this example, since the correction of the AT2 initial number is performed, it is possible to shift the AT2 state and the LMT state seamlessly (without passing through other rendering states).

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of cases / Case of displaying remaining game number in AT2 state>
FIG. 95 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects in the case of displaying the number of remaining games in the AT2 state in a cassette display.
The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 52. In this game R328, since the LMT standby flag is off in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed. Internally elected to watermelon 1), and 50G is selected as the number of AT-added games.

  In addition, in this game R328, at the same time as the AT2 effect is executed using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, that the start operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), While executing the navigation, without performing a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the presentation state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "LAST 52G") is not performed. A display (in this example, “LAST 2G”) including an image indicating the number of remaining games (in this example, 2) before adding the AT-added game number (in this example, 50) as a false display (Gase display) The display of the image containing the character "" is performed.

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 51. In this game R327, the AT2 effect is executed similarly to the game R328 using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted). At the same time, while performing operation navigation, display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image containing the characters “LAST 51G”) A display (in this example) including an image showing the number of remaining games (in this example, 1) before adding the number of AT-added games (in this example, 50) as a false display (Gase display). The display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G" is executed.

  In addition, in this game R327, a display suggesting an AT addition (in this example, "in this example," when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start operation of the start lever 135)). Display after the display of the characters "I will continue", the notification of the number of AT added games triggered by the fact that another certain condition is met (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted) In this example, a display including the characters "+ 50G" and an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of effect state counter) in the true (true) AT2 state (in this example, "LAST 51G" The display of the image containing the character "" is performed.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times / When result display is performed on transition of AT2 state>
FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects in the case where results are displayed after the transition of the AT2 state.
The game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the depression of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to perform the AT2 as in the games R328 to R327. A display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the presentation state counter) (in the present example, a display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G”) ) Is running.

  Furthermore, in this game R326, it is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the satisfaction of a certain condition (in this example, the reception of the third stop operation). , While executing the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, the execution of result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the obtained number of game media) is not executed.

  The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judgment state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, until the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the depression operation of the start lever 135 is received (eg immediately after the BET)), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the result 1 in the AT2 state (1 For example, the display of the number of acquired game media is executed, and triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), using the effect image display device 157, Since the judgment effect corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started, and the number of remaining games in the judgment state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”).

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of cases / When result display is not performed after completion of AT2 state>
FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the result display is not performed after the end of the AT2 state, and corresponds to FIG. 95 (a).
In the effect described using FIG. 95 (a), in the game R69, since it is the final game of the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157, the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed. An example of executing result display 1 (for example, display of the number of obtained game media) in the AT2 state has been shown, but in this example, the same game R69, AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state Is displayed, while the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of obtained game media) is not performed in the AT2 state.

  According to this example, since it is possible to shift seamlessly from the AT2 state to the LMT state (without passing through other rendering states) and not to display the result in the AT2 state at the time of transition, from the AT2 state to the LMT state It is possible to give the player an impression of the effects in the high navigation state without making the player conscious of the transition of the game more than necessary.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “this invention 2-1”) has operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 1). Transition to one of the stop buttons 137 to 139), the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) Control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3), and operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or 45). Information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigator, the operation navigator using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc. is configured to be able to be notified. The said normal regarding notification of operation information It is an advantageous state over the state, and is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the specific counter The count value is configured to be updatable, and the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state is made when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is that the count value is This is a condition that holds when the first specific value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, a plurality of It is configured to be able to shift to any one of the advantageous gaming states of the advantageous gaming states, and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states can be notified of the operation information. The second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 or the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 (b) etc.), for example, is one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states. The advantageous gaming state of is a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "the third advantageous gaming state") different from the second advantageous gaming state capable of notifying the operation information (for example, the third illustrated in FIG. 97). 6 (b) and the like, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is one of the advantageous gaming states, the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous state. A certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the gaming states (hereinafter referred to as "the fourth advantageous gaming state". For example, in the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 or in the withdrawal state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) And the fourth advantageous gaming state is the second advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous for notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the three advantageous gaming states, the third advantageous gaming state, the count value is a second specific value (for example, 19 A game state that can be shifted from the second advantageous game state, and the stay can be made until the count value reaches the first specific value; The specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the end of the second advantageous game state, it is configured to be shiftable to the fourth advantageous game state, and the third After the advantageous gaming state ends, the normal state is entered, and the effects in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 97 and the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92 etc.) Aspect of the third advantageous gaming state That effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 97, ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) are different aspects and embodiments of it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 2-1 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine related to the invention 2-1, since it is easy to understand an advantageous game condition which can be expected, it is possible to make the player play a game with feeling of expectation.

  Note that one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is an advantageous gaming state different from any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state, in which the operation information can be notified. (Hereinafter referred to as "the first advantageous gaming state"), and the first advantageous gaming state is even more advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous for notification of the operation information than the second advantageous gaming state Good.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 2-2”) has an operation means (for example, the stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the game console provided with the main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3, and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. The information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation etc. using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 etc. is configured to be able to be notified, and the advantageous state is notification of the operation information Is more advantageous than the normal condition It is a state, and is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), and whenever a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter is updated It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied, and the certain termination condition is that the count value is the first specific one. This is a condition that holds when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, among the plurality of advantageous gaming states It is configured to be able to shift to any one of the advantageous gaming states, and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states may be a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “first of For example, it is the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 6 (b), etc.), and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "second advantageous gaming state") different from the first advantageous gaming state capable of informing the operation information (for example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 or 6 (b), etc., and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is one of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous gaming state and the second of which the operation information can be notified. In a certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the advantageous gaming states (hereinafter referred to as "the third advantageous gaming state"; the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 (b), etc.) And one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "the fourth advantageous gaming state") which is different from any of the advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state. The fourth advantageous game state shown in FIG. 98 and the withdrawal state shown in FIG. 6 (b) etc.), wherein the fourth advantageous game state is the first advantageous game state, the second advantageous game state And the third advantageous gaming state is an advantageous advantageous gaming state which is more disadvantageous with regard to notification of the operation information than any advantageous gaming state of the third advantageous gaming state, the third advantageous gaming state is the second specific value (count value) For example, when it becomes 19), it is a game state that can be shifted from the second advantageous game state, and is a game state that can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value, The one specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the second advantageous gaming state ends, the fourth advantageous gaming state is configured to be shiftable, After the end of the three advantageous game states, the system shifts to the normal state. The aspect of the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 98 and the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92 etc.) is the effect in the third advantageous game state (for example, FIG. This is a mode different from the mode of the ED effect ed1 shown in 98 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 etc., and the second advantageous game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous game state. When transitioning from the fourth advantageous gaming state to a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, it is configured to transition to the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state is When transitioning to the gaming state in which the operation information can be notified from the state after the termination, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to transition to the first advantageous gaming state. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 2-2 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the invention 2-2, since it is easy to understand an advantageous game state which can be expected, it is possible to make the player play a game with feeling of expectation. In addition, expectations can be given even after the end of the advantageous game state that can be expected.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention invention 2-3”) has an operation means (for example, the stop button 137 shown in FIG. Control means for transitioning to any one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6 (b)) For example, the game console provided with the main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3, and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the number-of-payouts display 127 shown in FIG. The information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation etc. using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 etc. is configured to be able to be notified, and the advantageous state is notification of the operation information Is more advantageous than the normal condition It is a state, and is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 etc.), and whenever a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter is updated It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied, and the certain termination condition is that the count value is the first specific one. This is a condition that holds when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, among the plurality of advantageous gaming states Transitioning to one of the advantageous gaming states, and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of the advantageous gaming states may be a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “second of For example, it is the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 (b), etc., and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "third advantageous gaming state") different from the second advantageous gaming state capable of informing the operation information (for example, the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99 or 6 (b) etc., and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is different from any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth advantageous gaming state"; for example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99 or the withdrawal state shown in FIG. 6 (b) or the like); The advantageous game state is the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game letter. It is an advantageous advantageous game state that is disadvantageous for notification of the operation information than any advantageous game state of the state, and in the third advantageous game state, the count value has become a second specific value (for example, 19) In this case, it is a gaming state that can be shifted from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state that can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value, and the first specific value The second specific value is another value, and is configured to be shiftable to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state ends, and the third advantageous gaming state is After completion, the mode is shifted to the normal state, and the mode of the effects in the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 99 and the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92 etc.) is An effect in the third advantageous gaming state (e.g. This is a mode different from the mode of the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 99, the ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc., and the lottery result is the first combination in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, shown in FIG. In the case of the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1), a first notification capable of identifying the first combination (for example, the second image g1 shown in FIG. 99 or the identifiable display shown in FIG. 94 (b) A second notification indicating that it is possible to notify of g1 (display of a symbol of watermelon) and the lottery result is the first combination in the second advantageous gaming state. (For example, the second image g2 shown in FIG. 99 or the unidentifiable display g2 shown in FIG. -! -! It is comprised so that alerting | reporting of "display" can be carried out, It is a game stand characterized by the above. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 2-3 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the invention 2-3, since it is easy to understand an advantageous game state which can be expected, it is possible to make the player play a game with feeling of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous game state that can be expected, the player is made to play a game by giving a sense of expectation, and in the advantageous game state in the restricted state, the player is not beaten, dropping is prevented and the advantageous state is ended pleasantly. It can be done.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention 2-1 to 2-3 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, in the case where the lottery process for internally winning the winning combination is performed and the lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result is provided Notification may be configured so that the certain notification mode in the third advantageous gaming state may be different from the certain notification aspect in the second advantageous gaming state .

  Further, in the case where the lottery result is the second combination (for example, the small combination 4 (bell) shown in FIG. 5 (a) and FIG. 7), the operation information can be notified. The notification of the operation information of the second combination in the advantageous gaming state may be the same as the notification of the operation information of the second combination in the second advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, since the operation navigation mode does not change depending on the type of the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to prevent the dropping prevention and the like of the pressing parter and to maintain the player's willingness to play the game. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  The operation information may be information capable of identifying the stop position and the stop order of each of the reels capable of displaying the combination of the symbols related to the second combination.

  Further, in the second advantageous game state, the number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state can be increased, and in the third advantageous game state, the number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state is increased. The number of remaining games may not be increased.

  With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state in the restricted state, the advantageous state can be comfortably terminated without the player being overwhelmed more than necessary. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  It should be noted that a display indicating that the number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state is increased may be displayed, and the number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state may be increased. May be configured so as not to be displayed.

  In addition, when the second advantageous gaming state ends, a certain end display (for example, an AT end screen shown in FIG. 92, etc., which suggests the end of the AT2 state) can be displayed, A process that regulates transitioning to the third advantageous gaming state after transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state and before the certain end display relating to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed (For example, the process using the LMT standby flag described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91) may be configured to be executable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is impossible to take profits in an advantageous game state that can be expected, to satisfy the player's satisfaction, and as a result, to give the player a sense of expectation It becomes possible. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  Further, when transitioning to the third advantageous gaming state, a certain freeze effect may be executable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give an opportunity for the player to switch feelings because it is easy to understand an advantageous gaming state that should not be expected. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the initial remaining game frequency of the second advantageous game state is variable (for example, the game frequency corrected by the game frequency determined by the AT2 initial frequency lottery of FIG. 89A, the game frequency shown in FIG. 89B) The initial remaining game number of the third advantageous gaming state may be fixed (for example, 20 G).

  With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state in the regulation state, the advantageous state can be pleasantly ended without being disturbed. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, in the second advantageous gaming state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the display of the number of remaining games shown in FIG. 95 (b) etc.) (False display)) is configured to be displayed, and in the third advantageous gaming state, an indication indicating a number less than the actual number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state May be configured not to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state in the regulation state, the advantageous state can be pleasantly ended without being disturbed. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous game state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  In one of the advantageous states, the fourth advantageous game state (for example, the pullback state) may not be shifted after the third advantageous game state is ended.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three bet game) in which the bet number of game media is the first number, and a second game (for example, two bets) in which the bet number of game media is the second number Game is configured to be executable, the second number is a number different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game. The game may be configured so as not to start transition to the second advantageous gaming state when the second game is played.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which of the first game and the second game is being played by whether or not to shift to the second advantageous game state. In some cases, it may be possible to notice that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

  Moreover, when it does not shift to the advantageous game state which can alert | report the said operation information from the said 4th advantageous game state, you may be comprised so that transfer to the said normal state is possible.

  Further, the above-mentioned "the second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous gaming state than the first advantageous gaming state," means that "playing of gaming media in one of the first advantageous gaming states is made." The expected acquisition value of gaming media in one of the second advantageous gaming states may be higher than the expected value.

  In addition, the above-mentioned "fourth advantageous gaming state, notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming state of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state And the fourth advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state. The frequency of the notification of the operation information is lower than the gaming state, or it is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation information is not notified.

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail using the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, only the configuration different from the gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments will be described in principle. Further, FIGS. 100 to 107 are basically used only for the description of the third embodiment, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the third embodiment, FIGS. The code shown in 107 takes precedence.

<Various operations>
First, various operations that can be performed in the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine according to the third embodiment is the cross key 192 shown in FIG. 101 in addition to the start lever 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, bet buttons 130 to 132, medal return button 133, and settlement button 134 described with reference to FIG. Also, operation means such as a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 102 are provided, and various operations can be performed by these operation means. In addition to various operations by these operation means, an insertion operation by inserting a medal from the medal insertion port 141 is also possible.

  Hereinafter, the operation by the start lever 135 may be referred to as “lever operation”, the operation by the PUSH button 194 as “PUSH button operation”, and the operation by the cross key 192 as “cross key operation”.

<State transition of various operations>
Next, an example of state transition of various operations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a state transition of PUSH button operation, cross key operation, closing operation, and lever operation.

  The state indicated by “o” in FIG. 100 is a state in which acceptance of various operations is valid, and the state indicated by “x” in the same figure is a state in which acceptance of various operations is invalid. The slot machine according to the third embodiment is configured to determine whether the various operations are valid or invalid according to the state transition shown in the figure, and when the operation is valid, perform corresponding display.

  For example, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is displayed (or not displayed), and the setting screen is not displayed, the operation with the cross key 192 corresponding to “setting screen call” is effective. When the operation is accepted, the display of the setting screen is started (setting screen call is performed), but since the PUSH button operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed , Does not start the display of the setting screen (do not call the setting screen).

  In addition, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, since the insertion operation corresponding to “determine AT2 type” is valid, the operation is accepted. Although the AT2 effect character determination (AT2 type determination) to be described later is performed, but the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, the AT2 effect character No decision (AT2 type decision) is made.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is also effective in addition to the insertion operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination”. Also when the button operation is accepted, the character of AT2 effect is decided (AT2 type decision).

  In addition, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is displayed, any of the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" Since it is invalid, the character can not be determined, but since the operation other than the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type selection screen display" is effective, it is possible to select the character by the operation other than the lever operation.

  In addition, when the previous game is replaying, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the lever operation corresponding to “determine AT2 type” is valid, and thus the operation is accepted. , AT2 effect character determination (AT2 type determination), but the PUSH button operation, cross key operation, and closing operation are invalid, so even if the operation is performed, the AT2 effect character determination (AT2 Do not type determination).

  On the other hand, when the previous game is replaying, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is also effective in addition to the insertion operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination". Even when the operation is accepted, the determination of the character of the AT2 effect (AT2 type determination) is performed. In these cases, although the insertion operation is invalid, the insertion operation may be validated, and when the operation is accepted, the character of AT2 effect may be determined (AT2 type determination).

<Specific example of various operations>
Next, specific examples of various operations including the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 101A is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching the display of the normal screen and the demonstration screen in time series.
In this example, when the normal image is displayed using the effect image display device 157, when the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is started. Here, the setting screen is a screen for performing various settings related to the slot machine (for example, adjustment of volume, adjustment of light intensity, display of model information, and the like).

  Although the condition for starting the display of the setting screen is not particularly limited, in this example, the display of the setting screen is started only when the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received during non-game When the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted, the display of the setting screen is not started.

  When the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the setting screen is displayed, the display of the demo screen is started. Here, the demo screen is a screen that is mainly displayed during non-game, and is, for example, a screen that displays an introduction of a new model, an advertisement for a game arcade, and the like. When an operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is received while the demonstration screen is displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (the demonstration screen is returned to the normal screen).

FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram showing an example of various operations in the case of performing the volume adjustment using the setting screen in time series.
In this example, when the normal image is displayed using the effect image display device 157, when the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is started. When the operation of the up button 192b (or the down button 192c) of the cross key 192 is received while the setting screen is displayed, the cursor (arrow) displayed on the setting screen is moved upward (or downward). In this example, since the operation of the upper button 192b is received on the setting screen, the cursor is moved upward to the volume adjustment position.

  When the cursor is moved to a certain menu, display of a submenu corresponding to the cursor is started. In this example, since the cursor is moved to the volume adjustment position, the display of the volume adjustment screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is started. When the operation of the right button 192 d (or the left button 192 e) of the cross key 192 is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen, it is possible to adjust the volume and the volume meter displays the adjusted volume . In this example, since the operation of the right button 192 d is accepted once on the volume adjustment screen, the volume is raised by one level (in this example, from level 3 to level 4 at five levels of levels 1 to 5) ) And the volume (Level 4) after adjustment by the volume meter.

  In addition, when the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment is ended and the setting screen is restored. In this example, since the operation of the determination button 192a is received after the adjustment of the volume, the volume adjustment is ended, and the display of the volume adjustment screen is switched to the display of the setting screen. Subsequently, since the operation of the lower button 192c performed on the setting screen is accepted, the cursor is moved downward to the position of "RETURN". The subsequent operation and display are the same as the example described using FIG. 101 (A).

FIG. 101C is a diagram showing an example of various operations in the case of performing the volume adjustment without displaying the setting screen in time series.
In this example, when the normal image is displayed using the effect image display device 157, when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the volume adjustment screen is started.

  Although the condition for starting the display of the volume adjustment screen is not particularly limited, in this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed only when the operation of the right button 192 d (or the left button 192 e) of the cross key 192 is received during non-game When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during the game, the display of the volume adjustment screen is not started.

  When the operation of the right button 192 d (or the left button 192 e) of the cross key 192 is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen, it is possible to adjust the volume and the volume meter displays the adjusted volume The points are the same as the example described using FIG. 101 (B). Also, when the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received during display of the volume adjustment screen, the volume adjustment is ended, and the screen returns to the volume adjustment end screen indicating that the volume has been determined. Further, when the operation of the determination button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the display of the demo screen is started.

FIG. 101D and FIG. 101E are diagrams showing an example of other various operations in time series.
In the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (A), when an operation for inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is received during display of the demonstration screen, display of the normal screen is started (returning from the demonstration screen to the normal screen) Although an example is shown, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), when an operation for inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is received while the setting screen is displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (usually from the demonstration screen) It may be configured to return to the screen).

  Further, in the example described using FIG. 101 (B), the normal screen starts to be displayed when an insertion operation of the medal to the medal insertion slot 141 is received during display of the demonstration screen after the volume adjustment (Demo screen In the example shown in FIG. 101 (E), the normal screen is displayed when the medal insertion operation to the medal insertion slot 141 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. It may be configured to start (return from the demo screen to the normal screen). In this case, when the closing operation is accepted after the display of the volume adjustment end screen, the volume adjustment may not be performed because the volume is not determined, or the volume adjustment end screen Even before the display of (even before the volume is determined), the volume adjustment may be performed with the volume displayed on the volume adjustment screen at the time of the closing operation.

<Specific example of character selection operation>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, a specific example of the character selection operation (hereinafter, may be referred to as "character character operation") will be described.
Here, the character selection operation is an operation for selecting characters to be made to appear in various effects according to the player's preference. In the slot machine according to the third embodiment, the character selection operation is performed by the various operations described above. It can be performed.

<Specific example of character selection operation / example where character can not be selected by player's intention>
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the character selection operation when the rendering state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state in time series, and FIG. 102 (A) shows Example 1 of the character operation in time series FIG.

  In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted during display of the AT2 confirmation display screen indicating that transition to the AT2 state has been decided, display of the character operation screen for performing charactere operation in the AT2 state is displayed. It has started. Although the display mode of the character selection operation screen is not particularly limited, in this example, the player is able to select a favorite character from three types of characters A, B, and C, and the first of the character selection operation screen In the display of (default), the character A has been temporarily selected.

  If an operation of PUSH button 194 is accepted during display of this character selection operation screen, the operation becomes a character determination operation, and a character temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen is a character appearing in an AT2 effect executed in the AT2 state. It is determined. Thereby, in the AT2 state, the effect by the character determined by the player is started.

  In this example, since the character A is temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined as the character A by the character determining operation, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Subsequently, the insertion operation (or the BET operation) is performed in a state in which the AT2 effect is started, and when the depression operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the first game in the AT2 state is started.

FIG. 102 (B) is a diagram showing the second embodiment of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, since the insertion operation is accepted during display of the AT2 determination display screen, the character of the default is displayed without displaying the character sale operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character). AT2 production by A has been started.

FIG. 102 (C) is a diagram showing the third embodiment of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the display of the AT2 determination display screen is being displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen is started, but the input operation is accepted while the character selection operation screen is displayed. Thus, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without selecting a character in the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

  FIG. 102 (D) is a diagram showing the fourth embodiment of the character set operation in time series. In this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed because the right button 192 d of the cross key 192 is received while the AT2 determination display screen is displayed. However, the closing operation is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. Thus, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

<Specific example of character selection operation / example where character can be selected by player's intention>
FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing the fifth example of the character set operation in time series. In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted during display of the AT2 determination display screen, the display of the character operation screen cd1 is started, and the right button of the cross key 192 is displayed while the character operation screen cd1 is displayed. The volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed because the volume 192d is received. Further, in the present example, since the closing operation is received while the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed, the character sale operation screen cd1 is displayed again, and then the closing operation is received while the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed. Even in this case, the insertion operation is not accepted as the character determination operation (the character is not selected against the player's intention), and the display of the character operation screen cd1 is maintained.

  Then, when the depression operation (lever operation) of the start lever 135 is received during display of the character selection operation screen cd1, a character notifying that the character (in this example, the character A) to be made to appear in the AT2 effect is determined. After displaying the decision screen ed1, an AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

FIG. 103 (B) is a diagram showing the sixth example of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, the flow from the display of the volume adjustment screen sd1 to the re-display of the character set operation screen cd1 is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 103 (A), but of the character set operation screen cd1 after re-display. Since the operation of the PUSH button 194, that is, the character determination operation is received during display, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character operation screen, and is caused to appear in the AT2 effect After displaying the character determination screen ed1 notifying that the character (in this example, the character A) has been determined, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to (C), the PUSH button 194 is configured with a button that can emit light, and the PUSH button 194 is configured to emit light in the state where the charactere operation screen can be displayed. doing.

FIG. 104 (A) is a diagram showing the sixth example of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, since the character sale operation screen can be displayed during display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the non-emitting PUSH button 194 which has been turned off is caused to emit light, and the operation of the PUSH button 194 (character launch operation When the call operation of the screen is received, the display of the character sale operation screen is started. Further, even while the character selection operation screen is being displayed, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed, when the PUSH button 194 is made to emit light and the operation (character determination operation) of the PUSH button 194 is received, The character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character operation screen, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Further, during this AT2 effect, the PUSH button 194 is turned off since the character sale operation screen can not be displayed.

FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing the seventh embodiment of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, the PUSH button 194 is turned off since the character adjust operation screen can not be displayed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the demo screen is displayed. In this example, while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment end screen is displayed when the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received. For example, a certain period of time (for example, 10) is displayed on the volume adjustment screen. When the second) has elapsed, the display of the volume adjustment end screen may be started.

FIG. 104 (C) is a diagram showing the eighth embodiment of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, the flow until the volume adjustment end screen is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 104 (B), but when the operation of the PUSH button 194 not shown is received, the AT2 determination display screen Is displayed again, and since the character set operation screen can be displayed during the display, the non-emitting PUSH button 194 which has been turned off is emitted.

<Specific Example of Character Select Operation / Modified Example>
FIG. 105 (A) is a diagram showing modification 1 of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, after the character selection operation screen is displayed, a selection determination effect of notifying information (in the present example, the character A) of the character selected on the character selection operation screen is performed. With such a configuration, the player can confirm whether the desired character is selected or not before the effect is started, and it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing modification 2 of the character set operation in time series.
In this example, since the insertion operation is accepted during display of a screen other than the character set operation screen, the character set operation screen is not displayed (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character), default. Since the AT2 effect by the character A is started, the selection determination effect is not performed. Such a configuration may reduce discouragement of the player even if the player is not given the opportunity to select a favorite character.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "this invention 3-1") can display a plurality of types of displays. Means for playing the game, wherein the game console is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for a first determination (hereinafter referred to as “first display For example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 106, and the character set operation screen cd1 shown in FIG. 103 (A), one of the plurality of types of display is the operation for the second determination. 106 (hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 106, the volume adjustment screen sd 1 shown in FIG. 103A), and the first display is displayed. First operation (e.g. In addition to the operation h1 shown in FIG. 106 and the closing operation shown in FIG. 103 (A), the operation of the PUSH button 194, the operation of any of the plurality of buttons included in the cross key 192, an operation among these operations When a plurality of operations are performed, a decision on the first decision (for example, selection of a character to be made to appear in a certain effect) is configured to be executable, and the first display is displayed. The second display is configured to be able to start displaying, and the display is started after the first display is started and before the decision on the first decision is performed. In a state in which a second display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), it is configured such that a decision related to the first decision is not executed even if the first operation is performed. To be It is a game table for the butterflies. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-1 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 3-1, it is possible to carefully make a decision on the above decision (a decision on the first decision). Also, after the second display, there is a risk that the contents of the first display may be forgotten, and if the determination regarding the first display is not intended by the player (for example, it is made first at the start of the game) There is an operation (in the case where it is inadvertently determined by the insertion of the medal into the insertion slot, the depression of the insertion button), but such an unintended operation of the player is prevented and the loss of the player's willingness to play etc. Is possible.

  The gaming machine according to the invention 3-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended, The decision regarding the first decision may be configured not to be performed.

  With such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display for the later determination is finished, it is possible to carefully make the decision on the earlier determination (the decision on the first decision). This is because, after the second display, there may be cases where the content (the content of the first display) previously displayed is forgotten, or, for example, the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination regarding the first display When the operations are the same, there is a possibility that an unintended determination may be made by performing a repeat operation of the determination operation (for example, a continuous hitting operation etc.). Also, even if the determination operation for the second display and the determination operation for the first display are not the same, it is not intended when the determination operation for the first display is accidentally performed after the display of the second display. There is a risk that decisions will be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and after the display of the second display is ended, the first display is performed during the first display. And the decision on the first decision may not be taken.

  Moreover, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended; Although the decision on the first decision is not performed, the decision on the first decision is configured to be executable when the second operation is performed, and the first and second operations are different operations. It may be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make the decision on the previous decision (the decision on the first decision) to be carefully made. Also, the player can feel discomfort and earn time, and in the meanwhile, can remind the user of the first display. In addition, since a decision on the previous decision (a decision on the first decision) may be made by the lever operation following the closing operation, a smooth decision method should be provided to the player who is used to playing the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and after the display of the second display is ended, the first display is performed during the first display. Even if an operation is performed, the decision on the first decision is not performed, but the second operation is performed when another operation (hereinafter referred to as a "second operation") other than the first operation is performed. The decision on the one decision may be configured to be executable.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated in a state where the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) and the like) which may be used for effect is displayed and the first display is displayed. The determination regarding the first determination is configured to be executable, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and the display of the second display When the operation of the operating means is performed after the termination, the determination on the first determination may be executable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the first determination without being influenced by the display state by the operation means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since a stable determination is possible with the operation means that may be used for the effect, the player who does not show interest in the operation means may pay attention to the operation means to enjoy the effect. There is a possibility. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  Note that the operation means that may be used for the effect may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker) or a light output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device) The operation unit may be capable of adjusting the light amount and the brightness of the light.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a screen indicating that the AT2 state has been determined), and the first display is a state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to a state in which one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the state in which the fourth display is displayed, a decision relating to the first decision can be made May be configured.

  With such a configuration, the decision on the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is used to playing a game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  In the state where the fourth display is displayed, the display of the second display can be started, and after the display of the fourth display is started, the first display is displayed. In the state where the second display whose display has been started prior to being displayed is displayed, the determination on the first decision is configured to be executable when the first operation is performed. Good.

  With such a configuration, the decision on the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is used to playing a game. In addition, it is considered that the player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed is not interested in the determination regarding the first display, Such players can be determined smoothly. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In the state where it is not possible to start the execution of the replay, the display of both the first display and the second display can be displayed. It may be configured to be able to display only the first display of the first display and the second display in a state where execution of the replay can be started.

  In addition, in the state where execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination is not executed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the state where execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination is not executed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display (for example, interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the third display is a display configured of a plurality of scenes. The display of the plurality of scenes includes the display of a first scene and the display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is the first display in a state where the first display is displayed. When the first operation is performed, the display is started. When the first operation is performed while the first display is not displayed, the display of the second scene is started. It may be an indication.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three bet game) in which the bet number of game media is the first number, and a second game (for example, two bets) in which the bet number of game media is the second number Game is configured to be executable, the second number is a number different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game. It is a game, and in the first state in the first game, even if the first operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not executed, and the second game In the first state, the determination on the first decision may not be performed even if the first operation is performed.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which of the first game and the second game the player is playing by determining whether the first determination is made or not. In some cases, it may be possible to notice that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 3-2") has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for a first determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”. For example, 107 is a first display d1 shown in FIG. 107, and character character operation screen cd1 shown in FIG. 103 (B), and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for the second determination ((1) Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display.” For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 107 and the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. 103 (A), one of the plurality of types of displays is Display after decision on the first decision ( The third display d3 shown in FIG. 107, the character determination screen ed1 shown in FIG. 103 (B), and the first display is displayed. The first operation (for example, an operation h1 shown in FIG. 107, an operation of the PUSH button 194, an operation of any of a plurality of buttons included in the cross key 192, in addition to the closing operation shown in FIG. When a plurality of these operations are performed, the third display can be displayed, and the second display can be started in the state where the first display is displayed. A state in which the second display is displayed, the display being started after the display of the first display is started and before the display of the third display is displayed. Hereinafter, it is referred to as the "first state". In, even if the first operation is performed, the third display is configured so that it does not appear, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-2 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 3-2, it is possible to carefully make a decision on the above decision (a decision on the first decision). Also, after the second display, there is a risk that the contents of the first display may be forgotten, and if the determination regarding the first display is not intended by the player (for example, it is made first at the start of the game) There is an operation (in the case where it is inadvertently determined by the insertion of the medal into the insertion slot, the depression of the insertion button), but such an unintended operation of the player is prevented and the loss of the player's willingness to play etc. Is possible.

  The gaming machine according to invention 3-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended, The third display may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display for the later determination is finished, it is possible to carefully make the decision on the earlier determination (the decision on the first decision). This is because, after the second display, there may be cases where the content (the content of the first display) previously displayed is forgotten, or, for example, the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination regarding the first display When the operations are the same, there is a possibility that an unintended determination may be made by performing a repeat operation of the determination operation (for example, a continuous hitting operation etc.). Also, even if the determination operation for the second display and the determination operation for the first display are not the same, it is not intended when the determination operation for the first display is accidentally performed after the display of the second display. There is a risk that decisions will be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and after the display of the second display is ended, the first display is performed during the first display. The third display may not be displayed even if the operation of the above is performed.

  Moreover, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended; Although three displays are not displayed, the third display may be configured to be displayable when a certain operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") other than the first operation is performed. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make the decision on the previous decision (the decision on the first decision) to be carefully made. Also, the player can feel discomfort and earn time, and in the meanwhile, can remind the user of the first display. In addition, since a decision on the previous decision (a decision on the first decision) may be made by the lever operation following the closing operation, a smooth decision method should be provided to the player who is used to playing the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and after the display of the second display is ended, the first display is performed during the first display. Even though the third operation is performed, the third display is not displayed, but the third operation is performed when another operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") different from the first operation is performed. The display may be configured to be displayable.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated in a state where the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) and the like) which may be used for effect is displayed and the first display is displayed. The third display is configured to be displayable, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and after the display of the second display is ended. The third display may be configured to be displayable when the operation means is operated.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the first determination without being influenced by the display state by the operation means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since a stable determination is possible with the operation means that may be used for the effect, the player who does not show interest in the operation means may pay attention to the operation means to enjoy the effect. There is a possibility. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  Note that the operation means that may be used for the effect may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker) or a light output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device) The operation unit may be capable of adjusting the light amount and the brightness of the light.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a screen indicating that the AT2 state has been determined), and the first display is a state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to a state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the state where the fourth display is displayed, the third display can be displayed It may be done.

  With such a configuration, the decision on the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is used to playing a game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  In the state where the fourth display is displayed, the display of the second display can be started, and after the display of the fourth display is started, the first display is displayed. When the first operation is performed in a state where the second display whose display has been started before being displayed, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

  With such a configuration, the decision on the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is used to playing a game. In addition, it is considered that the player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed is not interested in the determination regarding the first display, Such players can be determined smoothly. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's unintended operation and to prevent the player from losing their willingness to play the game.

  In addition, lottery processing regarding internal winning of the combination is performed, and lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In the state where it is not possible to start the execution of the replay, the display of both the first display and the second display can be displayed. It may be configured to be able to display only the first display of the first display and the second display in a state where execution of the replay can be started.

  In addition, in a state where execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

  In addition, in a state where execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display (for example, interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the fifth display is a display configured of a plurality of scenes. The display of the plurality of scenes includes the display of a first scene and the display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is the first display in a state where the first display is displayed. When the first operation is performed, the display is started. When the first operation is performed while the first display is not displayed, the display of the second scene is started. It may be an indication.

  In addition, the game where the bet number of game media is the first number (hereinafter referred to as "the first game"; for example, a three bet game) and the game where the bet number of game media is the second number (hereinafter , “The second game.” For example, it is configured to be able to execute two bet game, the second number is a number different from the first number, and the second game The first game is a game advantageous to the player, and the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed in the first state of the first game. In the first state of the second game, the third display may not be displayed even if the first operation is performed.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which of the first game and the second game the player is playing by determining whether the first determination is made or not. In some cases, it may be possible to notice that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

  Note that, during the AT2 state (or the AT1 state), an increase display of points (a display (a title or an item) corresponding to an internal point) may be performed according to the small winning combination. Further, the degree of advantage in the judge state may be changed according to the value. Further, based on the points or the like accumulated by the player, a turning effect may be performed in the final game such as the AT2 state to determine or notify the mode of the judge state.

  In addition, in the case of the second game (two-piece game), there may be no increase in points, items, and the like. In addition, when it is configured not to display (skip) a specific scene in the second game (two-piece game), it may also be configured not to display (skip) a scrapping effect.

  In addition, on the game console of the specification that the bonus symbol will be aligned if the symbol is not avoided, the operation navigation is performed in the displayable state (in the inside condition, in the case of small part not being necessarily drawn off except in replay May be Also, when the symbols are aligned, predetermined effect display is repeatedly performed (for example, still image display is continued), and even if the final game of the advantageous section is reached at that time, the number of winning etc. You may display the result of. Also, after the transition to the normal section (after the next game), the predetermined effect may be continued.

  Further, during the bonus, the game may shift to the default screen of the normal gaming state after the bonus ends without shifting to the advantageous section. Further, during the bonus, the game may be shifted to a game state in which only the second game (two bet game) is possible. That is, in the gaming machine of the specification in which the bonus symbols are aligned unless the symbols are avoided, only the second game (two bet game) may be possible during the bonus. In addition, during the bonus, a game with a difference number of 0 with two IN2 sheets and two OUT sheets may be played over several tens of games, and the bonus may end when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 sheets). .

  In addition, even if the value of the high navigation state counter remains 19 during the bonus game of the two-piece game, it may be configured not to shift to the LMT state. Moreover, although it does not shift to a LMT state, it is good also as a structure which starts ED production (or does not perform ED production). In addition, for example, when the bonus ends before the number of remaining games reaches 0, it may be possible to shift to the LMT state thereafter (or it may always shift, or in the case of shifting) May be In addition, even after entering the low navigation state after reaching the limiter during a bonus, the second game (two-piece game) is forced, and it is configured not to shift to the high navigation state during the game. Good.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Moreover, the width | variety of a game may be further expanded by applying the content currently described to one structure among other structures described in Embodiment 1-3 to another structure.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine typified by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed type game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

Reference Signs List 100 slot machine 110 to 112 reel 113 symbol display window 130 to 132 bet button 135 start lever 137 to 139 stop button 157 effect image display device 192 four-way controller 194 PUSH button 300 main control section 400 first sub-control section 500 second sub-control Department

Claims (7)

Operation means,
Control means for shifting to any one of the normal state and the advantageous state;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
A game console equipped with
It is comprised so that alerting | reporting of the operation information of the said operation means is possible,
The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation") ,
The operation navigation is a navigation about a pushing order,
Comprising a first counter for said advantageous state;
Every time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as "first count value") can be updated .
It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain ending condition is satisfied,
The certain end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value,
In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous gaming states,
One advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state,
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be performed,
A second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state;
Every time a game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated.
The second count value is configured to be able to be updated even if a game is not played in the first advantageous gaming state that has not been elected as a pushing order.
The first game in which the bet number of game media is the first number and the second game in which the bet number of game media is the second number are configured to be executable.
The second number is a number different from the first number,
In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”).
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”).
The certain value is a value related to the second count value,
After the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when the execution of the first game is started, both of the first count value and the second count value The count value is updated and the second display can be displayed in the first game,
After the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when said execution of the second game is started, among the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
One display of the previous SL plurality of types of display, the first display the remaining number of games in advantageous gaming state contains an image indicating the 0 (hereinafter, referred to as "third display".) In Yes,
If the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 2 , wherein
Even if the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game is not displayed without displaying the third display. The condition may end,
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 2 or 3 ,
One advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a second advantageous gaming state,
The second advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state which can execute the operation navigation , which is different from the first advantageous gaming state.
When the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state ends without the third display being displayed And the second advantageous gaming state may start,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
When the second count value reaches a predetermined value in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 , wherein
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth display") including an image regarding an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state.
If the first game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed,
When the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may not be displayed.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , wherein
In a state in which at least the first count value can be updated, and the winning probability of a replay player who can play a game regardless of insertion of gaming media is higher than the normal state , the first The winning probability of the second playing combination in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the second playing combination in the game,
A game stand characterized by